JP6747550B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a lottery of whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state such as a winning gaming state is triggered by entry of a gaming ball into a starting ball entering portion provided in a gaming area. Done. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the variable display of the picture is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and the stop result according to the lottery result is displayed when the final stop display of the variable display is performed. The display effect for one game is displayed. Further, when the lottery result is a so-called winning game state transition winning, after the display effect for one game is executed, for example, the opening and closing of the variable ball entrance device provided in the game area is executed, The payout of game balls according to the number of balls entered into the variable ball entrance device is executed.

In addition, when the game ball enters the starting ball entering section while the variable display of the pattern is being performed, the information used in the winning lottery is held and stored with a predetermined number (for example, 4) set in advance as an upper limit. There is a pachinko machine that is designed to work. In the case of being held and stored, after the variable display of the pattern is finished, the winning lottery is performed using the information stored and held, and the next variable display of the pattern is started (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2004-81853, A

Here, in the gaming machine illustrated above, it is necessary to raise the degree of attention to the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-illustrated circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

The present invention is
A pattern display means for variably displaying the pattern on the display screen,
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a prescribed number that is predetermined as a plurality of numbers as an upper limit,
In the case where the special information stored in the acquired information storage means determines whether or not the special information corresponds to predetermined additional information and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. Is a grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination for the plurality of special information,
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determining means being a grant corresponding result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information;
The variable display of the pattern is started in the pattern display means before the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination performed by the grant determination means. Displaying the stop result corresponding to the determination result and ending the variable display of the pattern is one of the game times, and the change of the pattern of each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game number control means for controlling the pattern display means so that display is performed,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game time control means determines, for each game time, mode information that determines mode information corresponding to the mode of display of the pattern on the display screen when the variable display of the pattern is performed, based on the result of the grant determination. When a variation display of the pattern of each game time is provided, a variation display of the pattern of each game time is performed in a display mode according to the mode information determined by the mode information determination means.
Information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the addition determination is set before the predetermined special information is the target of the addition determination. Destination specifying means to specify at timing,
A state setting means for setting a special notification state based on the specific result by the destination specifying means being a predetermined specific result,
In a situation in which the special notification state is set, in a situation in which a game time before the game time related to the special information specified by the destination specifying means when the setting is performed is being executed In such a situation that the special display corresponding to the identification result of the destination identification means for the special information as the identification target is executed by the design display means, and the variable display of the design is performed. When the special notification state is set in a predetermined period during the variable display of the pattern, special notification control means for causing the stop result of the game time to be a special mode corresponding to the special notification,
When the special notification state is set in a predetermined period during the variable display of the pattern in a situation where the variable display of the pattern is being performed, it is determined by the aspect information determining means in the game time. If the variable display time corresponding to the mode information that is present is a variable display time that needs to be changed to make the stop result the special mode, a special notification that prevents the stop result of the game time from being the special mode Limiting means,
Equipped with
A high probability state that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is likely to be the grant corresponding result, and a low probability state that is less likely to be the grant corresponding result than the high probability state is set,
As the granting correspondence result, the first granting correspondence result set to the high probability state after the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means, and the low probability after the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means The second assignment correspondence result set to the state is set,
The pattern display means has a first variable display area, a second variable display area, and a third variable display area as a plurality of variable display areas.
The game times control means, predetermined to the plurality of variable display area predetermined first effective line on which is formed by on the display screen, among the first grant picture corresponding to the previous SL first grant corresponding results by displaying stopped by aligning the pattern, to inform that the special information that triggered of the game times is the special information corresponding to the first grant corresponding result, to the effective line on the front Stories second The special information that triggers the game times is the special information corresponding to the second grant correspondence result by stopping and displaying the predetermined designs of the second grant patterns corresponding to the grant correspondence result. Is configured to notify
When the special notification state is set with the special information that is the first allocation correspondence result as a trigger, the special notification control unit is on the active line in the game time corresponding to the first allocation correspondence result. aligning with the predetermined pattern of said first imparting design to stop, is stopped and displayed all the variable display area in the plurality of variable display area, and the effective line on the predetermined one of the first grant picture If align the picture performs the special notification as said special mode that so as not to display stopped, setting of the special notification state is performed in response to the special information to be the second grant corresponding results, the In the game time corresponding to the second grant corresponding result, a predetermined pattern of the second grant patterns to be aligned and stopped on the activated line is stopped and displayed in all the variable display areas in the plurality of variable display areas, a and the effective on-line align the predetermined pattern of said second imparting design to perform the special notification as said special mode that so as not to display stop configuration,
In each game time, based on the result of the award determination, a variable display time determining means for determining a variable display time when the variable display of the pattern is performed is provided, and the aspect information determining means is the variable display time determining means. Determines the mode information corresponding to the variable display time determined by
In the mode information determined by the mode information determination means, as a step before the final stop of the variable display, stop display is performed in the first variable display area and the second variable display area of the plurality of variable display areas. Reach variation display in which a reach line is formed with the same pattern and the pattern is variably displayed in the third variable display area of the plurality of variable display areas under the condition that the reach line is formed. Aspects are included,
At least in a game game in which a specific reach variation display mode is performed, a pattern stop-displayed in the third variation display area is uniquely determined according to the variation display time determined by the variation display time determination means. Has been
The Specific reach varying display mode, said first applying pattern and the first specific reach varying display aspects Reach line is formed by either one of the pattern of said second imparting design, the first grant And a second specific reach variation display mode in which a reach line is formed by the pattern and a reach line is formed by the second imparted pattern,
The special notification control means is in a situation where the special notification state is set to the special notification state by the state setting means, and in the game time when the specific reach variation display mode is performed, the first variation display area and the second variation Execute reach pattern setting processing in which the reach pattern that is stopped and displayed in the display area to form the reach line is the first assigned pattern or the second assigned pattern corresponding to the special information that triggered the special notification. In addition, by keeping the pattern stopped and displayed in the third variable display area as the pattern corresponding to the variable display time, the specific reach variable display in the special notification state is set. In the game time in which the mode is performed, there is a configuration in which the special notification is executed and a case in which the special notification is not executed,
The special notification limiting means is a situation where the variable display of the pattern is being performed in a mode in which the reach variable display mode is not executed, and the special notification state is set during a predetermined period during the variable display of the pattern. If the variation display time corresponding to the aspect information determined by the aspect information determining means in the game time is the variation display time that needs to be changed to make the stop result the special aspect, , The special notification state is set in a situation in which the variation display of the pattern is being performed in a manner in which the reach variation display mode is executed, while preventing the game times from being stopped as the special mode. When the special notification state is set, the reach pattern setting process is not executed, and the pattern that is stopped and displayed in the third variable display area is variably displayed regardless of the period when the special notification state is set. By keeping the pattern according to the time, when it is necessary to change the variable display time at the game time, the stop result of the game time does not become the special mode,
The second specific reach varying display mode is performed by the second picture of the first picture and the second applying pattern of said first imparting picture, the first picture pattern in the third variation display region and in Yu technique of times that the second pattern still appears stopped, the state is set to the special notification state by setting means, the special notification was triggered state of setting the special information the first grant corresponding results I Oh, the special case where it is configured to perform the special notification in notification status by said first pattern of said first imparting design, the second identification by said second pattern and said first pattern And a means for changing the reach variation display mode of No. 1 to the first specific reach variation display mode by the first pattern.

It is possible to favorably increase the degree of attention to the game.

The front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. The perspective view which expands and shows the main composition of a pachinko machine. The perspective view which expands and shows the main composition of a pachinko machine. The front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A) The front view of the operating port device which shows the case where an electric accessory is in a closed state, (b) The front view of the operating port device which shows the case where an electric accessory is in an open state. The block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the symbol displayed on a symbol display device. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display device. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of various counters used for a winning/winning lottery. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a win/loss table, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a distribution table. The flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in MPU of a main control apparatus. The flowchart which shows the winning process for the operating ports in MPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows the confirmation process for reservation notice. The flowchart which shows the setting process of a hold command. The flowchart which shows the winning process for through. The flowchart which shows a normal process. The flowchart which shows a game time control process. The flowchart which shows a data setting process. The flowchart which shows a fluctuation|variation start process. The flowchart which shows the setting process of variable display time. The flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. The flowchart which shows the process for electric power support. The flowchart which shows an electric power combination opening/closing process. The block diagram which shows the electric constitution which concerns on a reservation notice. The flowchart which shows a hold command corresponding process. The flowchart which shows a big hit correspondence setting process. The flowchart which shows a detachment reach correspondence setting process. The flowchart which shows a variable display control process. The flowchart which shows the process for a fluctuation start. The flowchart which shows the stop result setting process which does not respond to a reservation notice. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a middle symbol row stop result table. The flowchart which shows the stop result setting process for detachment normal reach which does not respond to a reservation notice. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the stop line change table for big hits. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a variable display pattern table. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating reach display. The flowchart which shows the process for a fluctuation end. The flowchart which shows the stop result setting process corresponding to a reservation notice. The flowchart which shows the stop result setting process for detachment normal reach corresponding to a reservation notice. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the aspect of the reservation notice in a normal reach display. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the aspect of the reservation notice in a normal reach display. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a stop line change table for an advance notice. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the aspect of the reservation notice in a normal reach display. The flowchart which shows a flag deletion process. The flowchart which shows the process during change. (A) Explanatory drawing for explaining the 1st stage correction table, (b) Explanatory drawing for explaining the 2nd stage correction table, (c) Explanatory drawing for explaining the 3rd stage correction table .. The time chart for explaining the situation when the variable display pattern is corrected and the suspension notice is executed. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific aspect of a reservation notice. The flowchart which shows the stop result setting process for detachment|movement normal reach corresponding to the suspension notice in 2nd Embodiment. (A) Explanatory drawing for explaining the reach symbol determination table for non-specific symbol hold notice, (b) Explanatory drawing for explaining the reach symbol determination table for specific symbol hold notice. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the aspect of the reservation notice in a normal reach display. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the aspect of the reservation notice in a normal reach display. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific aspect of a reservation notice. The flowchart which shows the stop result setting process for detachment|movement normal reach corresponding to the suspension notice in 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the stop result setting process for detachment normal reach which does not respond to a reservation notice. The flowchart which shows the process during a change in 4th Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the reach corresponding process. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the reach correspondence 1st step correction table, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the reach correspondence 2nd step correction table. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a lower symbol row stop result correction table. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the aspect of the reservation notice in a normal reach display.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine, which is a type of gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as "pachinko machine"), will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing a main configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in a developed manner. Note that, in FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a gaming machine body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 forward. .. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting wooden plate members and the like on four sides, and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility.

The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. An inner frame 13 of the gaming machine body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 is rotatable forward when the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation front end side when viewed from the front.

As shown in FIG. 2, a front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14 can be turned forward in a front view with the left side being a rotation base end side and the right side being a rotation tip side. It is said that. As shown in FIG. 3, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the back pack unit 15 is turned rearward when viewed from the front, with the left side being the rotation base end side and the right side being the rotation front end side. It is possible to move.

As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at its rotating front end, and the gaming machine main body 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened from the outer frame 11. And has a function of locking the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 such that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings that penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. In each opening, a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper working opening (first starting ball entering section or non-priority starting ball entering section) 33, a lower working opening (second starting ball entering section or priority starting ball entering) Section 34, through gate 35, variable display unit 36, main display section 43, accessory display section 44, and the like, respectively.

When a ball enters the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper working opening 33, and the lower working opening 34, it is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) arranged on the back side of the game board 24, Based on the detection result, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. In this case, payout of 10 game balls is executed when a ball is entered into the general winning opening 31, and 15 game balls are paid out when a ball is entered into the variable winning device 32. Is executed, and when three balls are entered into the upper working port 33, payout of three game balls is executed, and when four balls are entered into the lower working port 34, four game balls are paid out. Is executed.

The payout number of gaming balls is not limited to the above. However, in order to enhance the advantage of the lower working port 34 with respect to the upper working port 33, it is preferable to set the number of payouts of the lower working port 34 larger than the number of payouts of the upper working port 33. Further, in order to increase the advantage of the variable winning device 32 with respect to the respective operation ports 33, 34, it is preferable to set the number of payouts for the variable winning device 32 larger than the number of payouts for the respective operation ports 33, 34.

In addition, an outlet 37 is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered the various winning openings or the like are discharged from the game area through the outlet 37. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 38 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are provided.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the aspect of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but also discharging from the game area after passing through the opening. The mode which is not performed is also included. However, in the following description, in order to be clearly distinguished from the game ball entering the out port 37, the game ball entering the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, the lower operating port 34 or the through gate 35. Is also referred to as a prize.

The upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are unitized as a working port device and installed on the game board 24. Both the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are open upward. Further, the two working ports 33, 34 are arranged in the vertical direction, more specifically in the vertical direction, with the upper working port 33 facing upward. The lower working port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

Details of the electric accessory 34a will be described with reference to FIG. 5A shows the case where the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state (non-support state or non-guide state), and FIG. 5B shows the electric accessory 34a is in the open state (support state or guide state). The case is shown.

The operating port case 33a that constitutes the upper operating port 33 projects toward the front side and has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and the upper side length is smaller than the lower side length. At this time, the upper side length of the operating port case 33a (that is, the left-right width of the upper operating port 33) is set to be slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball, and the lower side length is when the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. The length is larger than the distance between the left and right electric accessory parts 34a. Further, when the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the interval between the operation openings 33 and 34 is set so that the distance between the operation case 33a and the upper end of the electric accessory 34a is slightly shorter than the diameter of the game ball. Has been adjusted.

According to the above configuration, the game ball cannot enter the lower working port 34 in the closed state of the electric accessory 34a, and the prize can be entered in the lower operating port 34 by opening the electric accessory 34a. At this time, in particular, during the operation of shifting the electric accessory 34a from the closed state to the open state, the operating port case 33a of the upper operating port 33 has a substantially trapezoidal shape as described above, which becomes an obstacle. Until the accessory 34a is fully opened, the game ball cannot be won into the lower working port 34, and the prize can be won only when the electric accessory 34a is almost fully opened. In other words, the game ball that has fallen from above hits the side surface of the operating port case 33a and is repelled to the outside, and does not directly enter the lower operating port 34. This makes it extremely difficult to win a prize in the lower working port 34 when the electric accessory 34a is opened in an extremely short time, and only when the open state of the electric accessory 34a is continued. Winning becomes easy.

In addition to the configuration in which the operating port case 33a of the upper operating port 33 has a substantially trapezoidal shape as described above, the operating port case 33a of the upper operating port 33 may have a two-stage configuration of a narrow upper portion and a wide lower portion, A substantially C-shaped guide piece may be provided on both the left and right sides of the mouth 33, or an obstacle nail may be planted obliquely below the operating mouth case 33a.

The variable winning device 32 has a big winning opening 32a leading to the back side of the game board 24, and an opening/closing door 32b for opening and closing the big winning opening 32a. The opening/closing door 32b is normally in a closed state in which the game balls cannot be won or is difficult to win, and when the game is won in the internal lottery to the open/close execution mode (open/close execution state), the game balls can easily win. It can be switched to the open state. Here, the open/close execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a big hit or a special out-of-match win is achieved. The opening/closing execution mode will be described in detail later. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 32, the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly opened with a predetermined time (for example, 30 sec) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings as one round, and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit. There is a mode.

The main display portion 43 and the accessory display portion 44 are provided on the decorative member 39 arranged along the outer edge of the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 39 extends from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces a window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 in order to make the game area visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and further with the window panel 62. The distance between them is smaller than that of one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 39.

The main display section 43 and the accessory display section 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 39. That is, the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and the front of both of these display units 43 and 44 are game balls. It is prevented from falling. In addition, on the upper surface of the decorative member 39, a part of the above-described general winning openings 31 is installed in a state of being opened upward.

The main display section 43 is provided with a display area, and in the display area, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34 is clearly shown. In other words, there is no distinction between winning in the upper working opening 33 and winning in the lower working opening 34, and the main display portion 43 performs the winning based on the winning in the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34. The result of the internal lottery is clearly shown in the common display area.

Although not shown in detail in the figure, the accessory display unit 44 has a segment indicator, and the segment indicator is provided with an accessory result display unit. The bonus product result display unit is a display unit for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35. In this case, in the accessory result display section, the variable display (or the variable display or the switching display) is performed by sequentially turning on and off the display segments by using the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger. As the stop result of the variable display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in the through gate 35 is clearly displayed. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning in the through gate 35 is the winning result corresponding to the shift to the electric role open state, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the role product result display portion and the variable display is displayed. After the power supply is stopped, the state is changed to the electric power release state. In the electric role open state, the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower operation port 34 is opened in a predetermined manner. Note that the accessory display unit 44 is not limited to the above configuration, and other configurations exemplified in the main display unit 43 may be applied, and a configuration different from the main display unit 43 is applied. May be.

The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 that variably displays (or variably displays or switches) the symbols. Further, the variable display unit 36 is provided with a center frame 42 so as to surround the symbol display device 41. The upper portion of the center frame 42 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from falling in front of the display screen of the symbol display device 41, and the inconvenience of lowering the visibility of the display screen due to the drop of the game ball does not occur. ..

The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. On the symbol display device 41, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the upper, middle, and lower sides, and these symbols are variably displayed by scrolling in the left-right direction. In this case, the variable display on the symbol display device 41 is started based on the winning of the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34. Then, for example, as the opening/closing execution mode, the game prize is set in advance in the symbol display device 41 for the game times to be switched to the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to 15 rounds in which the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened 15 times. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

At the upper left portion on the front surface side of the center frame 42, a first holding lamp portion 45 corresponding to the symbol display device 41 is provided. The maximum number of game balls that enter the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34 is held up to 4, and the number of holding is displayed by turning on the first holding lamp section 45. As described above, since the upper part of the center frame 42 extends toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, the visibility of the first holding lamp part 45 is not hindered by the fall of the game ball.

At the lower part of the center frame 42, a third holding lamp section 47 corresponding to the accessory result display section of the accessory display section 44 is provided. The number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reservations is displayed by turning on the third suspension lamp section 47. It should be noted that each of the holding lamp sections 45 to 47 may be configured to be displayed on a part of the symbol display device 41.

An inner rail portion 51 and an outer rail portion 52 are attached to the game board 24, and the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52 constitute a guide rail, and a game launched from the game ball launching mechanism 53. The ball is designed to be guided to the upper part of the game area. As shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 53 is mounted below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21, and the launch handle 54 provided on the front door frame 14 is operated to launch the game ball. The action is taken.

A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front surface side of the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is provided with a window portion 61 that allows the entire game area to be viewed from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 described above is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is made of glass to be colorless and transparent, but is not limited to this and may be made of synthetic resin to be colorless and transparent.

Around the window 61, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided. A display lamp portion 63 is provided above the window portion 61 as a part of the various lamp portions. In addition, speaker units 64 are provided on the left and right sides of the display lamp unit 63 to output sound effects and the like according to the gaming state.

Below the window portion 61 of the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66 which bulge toward the front side are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 71 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65, and a lower plate 72 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66. The upper plate 71 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 53 side while aligning them in a line. Further, the lower plate 72 has a function of storing game balls that have become redundant in the upper plate 71. The game balls dispensed from the dispensing device 96 of the back pack unit 15 are discharged to the upper plate 71 and the lower plate 72 through the passage forming unit 73 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 3, a main controller 81 and a voice lamp controller 82 are mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

The main controller 81 includes a main control board that controls the main game and a power failure monitoring board that monitors the power supply. The main control board and the power failure monitoring board are provided in a board box 83 made of a transparent resin material or the like. It is housed and configured. The board box 83 includes a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are inseparably connected by a box connecting portion 85 as a separation preventing means (or a connecting means), whereby the substrate box 83 is sealed. Further, since they are inseparably connected by the box connecting portions 85, it is necessary to break or partially cut the substrate box 83 when opening the internal space of the substrate box 83. A plurality of box joining portions 85 are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used for joining processing.

The box connecting portion 85 may have any structure as long as the box base and the box cover are connected to each other in a non-openable manner. However, by inserting the locking claws into the long holes forming the box connecting portion 85, It is designed to be permanently connected to the box cover. The merging process by the box merging unit 85 prevents illicit opening after the merging, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if illicit opening is performed. It is possible to perform the opening process again after the opening. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting the locking claw into at least one elongated hole of the plurality of box coupling portions 85. Then, when the board box 83 is opened when a failure occurs in the accommodated main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box connecting portion 85 in which the locking claw is inserted and another box connecting portion 85 are connected. Cut off the connection part of and the connection part with the box body. As a result, the box base and the box cover of the board box 83 are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the coupling process is performed again, the locking claws are inserted into the long holes of the other box coupling portions 85. If a history indicating that the board box 83 has been opened is left in the board box 83, the fact that the board has been opened illegally can be easily found by looking at the board box 83.

A plurality of coupling pieces 86 are provided on one short side of the board box 83 so as to project to the side. These coupling pieces 86 have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of coupled pieces 87 formed on the mounting base of the main control device 81, and the coupling piece 86 and the coupling pieces 87 form a board box 83 and a mounting base. Join processing is performed between the two.

A sealing means may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover as a trace means for detecting the unauthorized opening of the board box 83. In this case, when the seal sticker is peeled off from the pasted portion, the adhesive layer of the seal sticker remains on the substrate box 83 side, and the trace thereof remains. Further, an IC tag for transmitting a response wave containing identification information to a calling wave of a predetermined frequency is provided on the seal sticker, and when the seal sticker is peeled off, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the above-mentioned response is given. The wave may not be transmitted.

The voice lamp control device 82 includes a voice lamp control board that controls voice and lamp display and a display control device (not shown) according to an instruction from the main control device 81. The voice lamp control board is made of a transparent resin material or the like. It is configured to be housed in a substrate box 84.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, and the payout mechanism unit 92 and the control device assembly unit 93 are attached to the back pack 91. The back pack 91 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 94 protruding rearward and having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81, the voice lamp control device 82, and the like from the rear. doing.

The payout mechanism unit 92 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover unit 94, and a tank 95 to which game balls supplied from the island facility of the game arcade are successively replenished, and a game stored in the tank 95. And a dispensing device 96 for dispensing the ball. The game ball paid out from the payout device 96 is discharged to the upper plate 71 or the lower plate 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. Further, the payout mechanism 92 is provided with a back pack board provided with a main power supply of, for example, 24 V AC, and a power switch for performing ON and OFF operations of the power supply.

Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal plate 99 on the rotation shaft side of the back pack unit 15 and on the upper edge side. On the external output terminal board 99, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the game balls are insufficient in the tank 95, an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, a predetermined number of game balls Output terminal for outputting a signal each time the game machine is rented, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the gaming machine body 12 is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and a state transition such as opening/closing execution mode An output terminal is provided for outputting a signal at this time (or while transitioning to the state). Then, through these output terminals, a signal regarding the state of the frame side is output to the management control device of the game hall side. It should be noted that an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of game balls are lent out is not necessary in a so-called cash machine.

The control device grouping unit 93 includes a payout control device 97 and a power supply/launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 and the power supply/launch control device 98 are arranged in front of and behind each other so that the payout control device 97 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 96 is housed in a board box. In this case, the same fraud suppressing means as the board box 83 of the main controller 81 may be applied to the board box of the payout controller 97.

The power supply and launch control device 98 is configured by accommodating a power supply and launch control board in a board box, and the board generates and outputs predetermined power required by various control devices and the like, and further by the player. The control of the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the firing handle 54 is performed. Further, the pachinko machine 10 has a function of storing and storing various data, so that even if a power outage occurs, the pachinko machine 10 retains the state at the time of the power outage and can recover the state at the time of the power outage at the time of recovery from the power outage. It is like this.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 202 is mounted on the main control board 201 provided in the main controller 81. The MPU 202 is a ROM 203 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 202 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 203 is executed. The RAM 204 is an element having a built-in interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. Note that a part of the function of the MPU 202, for example, the function of the ROM 203 or the function of the RAM 204 may be provided as another element.

The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. To the input side of the MPU 202, the power failure monitoring board 205 provided in the main control device 81, the payout control device 97, various detection sensors 211a to 211e, etc. are connected. In this case, the power supply and firing control device 98 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 205, and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power failure monitoring board 205. In addition, as a part of the various detection sensors 211a to 211e, a winning portion corresponding to a winning portion such as a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper working opening 33, a lower working opening 34, a through gate 35, and the like (a paying-in corresponding winning portion) Is connected to a plurality of detection sensors, and the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 determines the winning of each of the winning portions (the winning determination). In addition, the MPU 202 executes the jackpot occurrence lottery based on the winning of the upper working opening 33 and the lower working opening 34, and also executes the support occurrence lottery based on the winning of the through gate 35.

A power failure monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, and a voice lamp control device 82 are connected to the output side of the MPU 202. To the payout control device 97, for example, a prize ball command is output based on the result of the winning determination to the winning-compatible winning portion. In this case, when outputting the prize ball command, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to. Then, when the winning to the general winning opening 31 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 gaming balls is output, and when the winning to the variable winning device 32 is specified, 15 winning balls are output. When the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the game balls is output and the winning of the upper working opening 33 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three gaming balls is output and to the lower working opening 34. When the winning a prize is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the four game balls is output.

Various commands such as a variation command, a type command, a variation end command, an opening command and an ending command are output to the voice lamp control device 82. In this case, when outputting these various commands, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each of the above commands is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as the information of the predetermined number of bytes.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 202, a variable winning a prize driving section 32c for opening and closing the opening/closing door 32b of the variable winning a prize device 32, an electric winning object driving section 34b for opening and closing an electric winning object 34a of the lower working opening 34, and a main display. The part 43 is connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 201, and the MPU 202 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

That is, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 202 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 32c so that the special winning opening 32a is opened and closed. When the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the MPU 202 executes drive control of the electric accessory driving unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is opened and closed. Further, the display control of the main display unit 43 is executed by the MPU 202.

Furthermore, an external output terminal board 99 is connected to the output side of the MPU 202. In this case, the external output terminal board 99 has a jackpot signal output terminal (first state signal output terminal) 99a and an jackpot and special off signal output terminal (second state signal) as output terminals for outputting a signal at the time of state transition. Output terminal) 99b.

When the game result is a big hit result, the MPU 202 can output a big hit signal to the management control device on the game hall side through the big hit signal output terminal 99a. Specifically, in the normal time, the LOW level signal is output from the jackpot signal output terminal 99a, and when the jackpot result is obtained, the HI level signal is output. The output mode of this signal may be reversed.

The power failure monitoring board 205 relays between the main control board 201 and the power supply and firing control device 98, and also monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply and firing control device 98. The payout control device 97 controls the payout device 96 to pay out prize balls or loan balls based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

The power supply/launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the main control board 201, the payout control device 97, and the like are generated with necessary operating power, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. To do. Further, the power supply and launch control device 98 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 53, and the game ball launch mechanism 53 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are satisfied.

The voice lamp control device 82, based on various commands input from the main control device 81, each of the holding lamp parts 45 to 47 provided in the variable display unit 36 and the display lamp part 63 provided in the front door frame 14 and the speaker. The drive control of the unit 64 and the display control device 212 are performed.

In the display control device 212, the display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed based on the command input from the voice lamp control device 82. In this case, in the voice lamp control device 82, based on various commands input from the main control device 81, the variable display time of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 and the type of the combination of symbols finally stopped and displayed are determined. , The presence/absence of the reach occurrence and the lottery of the contents of the reach effect are executed.

Here, the contents relating to the variable display of the symbols at each game time will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8.

The display control device 212 is provided with a character ROM. In the character ROM, as shown in FIGS. 7(a) to (i), data of nine types of main symbols with numbers “1” to “9” are added, and as shown in FIG. 7(j). The data of the sub-symbol with no number attached is stored in advance.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8(a), on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, three symbol columns Z1, Z2, Z3 of the upper stage, the middle stage and the lower stage are set. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Then, on the display screen G, the symbols in these symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left) with periodicity. In this case, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending order of the numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol column Z2, nine kinds of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1". The main symbols of "4" are additionally arranged, and one sub-symbol is arranged between these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and configured by 20 symbols.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, the display screen G is configured such that three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 3×3 nine symbols are stopped and displayed. It is supposed to be done. Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right downward line L4, and a right upward line L5 are set on the display screen G. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1→the lower symbol row Z3→the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same numeral on any of the activated lines is formed. When the variable display of Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the normal jackpot result or the probability variation jackpot result.

Considering that the variable display of each symbol column is stopped as described above, the upper symbol column Z1 is the first symbol column (or the first symbol column), and the lower symbol column Z3 is the second symbol column (or the second symbol column). 2 pattern row), the middle symbol row Z2 can be referred to as a third symbol row (or a third symbol row).

Of each of the main symbols, the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is equivalent to the "specific symbol", and when the probability variation jackpot result occurs, the same specific symbol The combination is stopped. Further, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) are equivalent to "non-specific symbols", and when a normal jackpot result occurs, the same combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. It

The mode of variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary, and the number of symbol columns, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol column, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be changed as appropriate. For example, a plurality of symbol rows may be set side by side, and the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row may be set to the vertical direction.

<About various counters>
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

The MPU 202 uses a variety of counter information at the time of a game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the main display unit 43, symbol display setting of the symbol display device 41, display setting of the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9, a jackpot random number counter C1 used in a lottery for jackpot occurrence, and a jackpot type counter C2 used in determining a jackpot type such as a probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result. The reach random number counter C3 used in the reach lottery when the symbol display device 41 fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the variable display time in the symbol display device 41 are determined. The fluctuation type counter CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory opening counter C4 used in the lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the lower operation port 34 is placed in the electric opening state is used.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 204. The RAM 204 is provided with a holding ball storage area 232 including a holding area RE and an execution area AE. Then, in the reserved ball storage area 232, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are time-series according to the winning history of the game balls to the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34. Will be stored in the memory.

For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 599), returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The jackpot random number counter C1 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34.

The value of the random number for the big hit is stored as a win/loss table (win/win information group) in the win/win table storage area 221 as the win/win information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the hit/miss table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, as the win/loss table, the win/loss table for low probability mode (low probability win/win information group) of FIG. 10A and the win/loss table for high probability mode of FIG. Probability information group) is set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the low-probability mode (low-probability state) and the high-probability mode (high-probability state) are set as the lottery modes in the win/loss lottery means.

In the gaming state in which the win/loss table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery, as shown in FIG. 10(a), there are two random number values for the jackpot win. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the win/loss table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, as shown in FIG. 10(b), the value of the random number for the jackpot win is 21. In this case, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the situation of the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the situation of the high probability mode. If the winning probability in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 29), returns to 0. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These plural jackpot results are (1) a mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, (2) a lottery mode in the winning/losing lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode, and (3) a bottom after the opening/closing execution mode. A plurality of jackpot results are set by differentiating the three conditions of the support mode in the electric accessory 34a of the operation port 34.

Here, as an aspect of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winnings in the variable winning device 32 becomes relatively high between the start and the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Thus, the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high frequency winning mode, the special winning opening 32a is opened and closed 15 times (the number of times of high frequency use) from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is 30 seconds (high frequency time). ) Has elapsed or until the number of winnings into the special winning opening 32a reaches 10 (high frequency number). On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the special winning opening 32a is opened and closed twice (the number of times of low frequency use) from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is 0.2 sec (low frequency time). Is continued or until the number of winnings to the special winning opening 32a becomes 6 (the number of low-frequency winnings).

In this case, in the pachinko machine 10, in the situation where the firing handle 54 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 53 is arranged so that one game ball is launched toward the game area in 0.6 sec. Drive controlled. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of one big winning opening 32a is 0.2 sec as described above. That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the big winning opening 32a once is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the opening/closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur.

In addition, the number of times of opening and closing the special winning opening 32a in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are lower in the high frequency winning mode. The value is not limited to the above value and may be arbitrary as long as the frequency of winning the variable winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is high. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode has more opening and closing times than the low-frequency winning mode, and if the opening limit time for one opening is long or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be large. Good.

However, in order to clarify the difference in privilege between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, the winning of the variable winning device 32 does not substantially occur. It is good to have a configuration. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the opening limit number is set shorter than the opening limit time for one opening, while in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening is set for one opening. The product of the game cycle of the game ball and the open limit number may be set to be longer than the open limit time. Further, even if the interval between shooting game balls and the opening time of one big winning opening 32a is not the above, in the low frequency winning mode, by setting the latter to be shorter than the former, It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which a prize is not substantially generated in the variable winning device 32.

As a support mode of the lower working port 34 in the electric accessory 34a, when compared in a situation where the game balls are continuously emitted in a similar manner to the game area, the electric working object 34a in the lower working port 34 is Low frequency support mode (low frequency support state or low frequency guide state) and high frequency support mode (high frequency support state or high frequency guide state) so that the frequency of open state per unit time becomes relatively high or low. And are set.

Specifically, the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode have the same probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric role opening lottery using the electric role opening counter C4 (for example, both are 4/5). However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electric role is released is set to be larger than in the low-frequency support mode, and one more opening is performed. The time is set long. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric power combination open state is won and the electric power accessory 34a is opened a plurality of times, it is closed from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The time is set shorter than the one-time opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is set shorter than that in the low frequency support mode when the next electric accessory release lottery is performed after one electric accessory release lottery is performed. Has been done.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the lower working opening 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the upper working opening 33 is higher than in the lower working opening 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the winning in the lower working opening 34 is higher than that in the upper working opening 33. The probability of winning is high. Then, when a prize is given to the lower working opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so in the high frequency support mode, the player plays the game while not reducing the number of balls that he holds. be able to.

Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency of the high frequency support mode being in the electric role open state per unit time higher than that of the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and for example, the electric role open lottery It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability of winning the electric role open state in is increased. Further, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is increased, and the minimum securing time required for the next electric auditors' item open lottery to be performed after one electric auditors' item open lottery is performed is shortened. By applying any one of the conditions (that is, shortening the one-time variable display time on the accessory display unit 44) and increasing the winning probability, the conditions for the low frequency support mode are applied. The advantages of the frequent support mode may be increased.

The jackpot type counter C2 is regularly updated and is stored in the holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 222 as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIG.

In the distribution table, as shown in FIG. 10B, a normal jackpot result (low probability corresponding special game result) and a probability variation jackpot result (high probability corresponding special game result) are set as the distribution destination of the game result. ing.

The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/loss lottery mode becomes the low-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, the high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result of shifting the game state to the normal jackpot state (low probability corresponding special game state).

The probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the winning/winning lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode is continued until the lottery result in the win/loss lottery is a big hit state win and the big hit state is transitioned accordingly. In other words, the probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result of shifting the game state to the probability variation jackpot state (high probability corresponding special game state).

The normal game state in relation to each of the above-mentioned game states means a state in which the winning/winning lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” correspond to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 29” correspond to the probability variation jackpot result.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238), returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34. More specifically, the game balls are stored in the holding area RE of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34. Then, it is determined whether or not the reach is generated based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 203. However, in the game time of shifting to the open/close execution mode, the MPU 202 determines the reach occurrence regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each gaming state, but may be individually set according to the gaming state. For example, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display may be set to be larger than that in the low frequency support mode.

Here, the reach display (reach state) includes a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (pattern), and the open/close execution mode of the variable winning device 32 is a high frequency winning mode. In the game times, the stop display result after the variable display is the special display result in the game machine. The stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or the variable display) of the symbol (pattern) on the symbol display device 41 is started. The display state for making the player think that the display state is a variable display state in which the special display result is likely to occur in the previous stage.

In other words, by stopping and displaying symbols for some of the plurality of symbol strings displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high frequency winning mode is established. It is a display state in which a reach symbol combination that may be displayed is displayed, and in that state, variable display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol columns.

More specifically, as a pre-stage for ending the variable display of the symbols, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is established on a preset effective line in the display screen of the symbol display device 41. The reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the combination of reach symbols that may be performed, and the variable display of the symbols is performed by the final stop symbol row under the situation where the reach line is formed.

Explaining the display contents of FIG. 8 in detail, first, the variable display of symbols is finished in the upper symbol row Z1, and the variable display of symbols is finished in the lower symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with the same numbers on the lines L1 to L5, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the variable display of symbols is displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. Reach display will be given. Then, when the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and in the middle symbol row Z2. The variable display of symbols is ended.

In addition, in the reach display, while the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variable display of the symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol rows, and the reach character is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. Examples include those that perform an effect and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen after reducing or displaying a combination of reach symbols. Further, when the reach display is being performed or before the reach display, whether or not the advance notice display using the predetermined image such as the predetermined character is performed is determined by using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. May be.

The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS is used when the MPU 202 determines the fluctuation display time on the main display unit 43 and the fluctuation display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired when the fluctuation pattern is determined by the symbol display device 41 at the start of fluctuation of the symbol.

The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 249, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 249). The electric accessory release counter C4 is regularly updated, and is stored in the electric accessory holding area 233 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed on whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4. For example, if C4=0 to 199, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to the open state, and if C4=200 to 249, the electric accessory 34a is not controlled to the open state.

As described above, in the MPU 202, the variable display time in the symbol display device 41 is determined by using at least the buffer value of the variation type counter CS, and the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203 is used in the determination. To be Further, the MPU 202 uses the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to determine the stop result on the main display portion 43. At the time of the determination, the stop of the ROM 203 is stopped. The result table storage area 224 is used.

Next, the reserved ball storage area 232 will be described. The hold sphere storage area 232 includes the hold area RE and the execution area AE as described above. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and according to the winning history of the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34. Numerical value information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 are stored in any of the holding areas RE1 to RE4. In this case, in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4, when the winnings to the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34 occur successively a plurality of times, the first holding area RE1→the second holding area RE1. Numerical information is stored in time series in the order of RE2→third reservation area RE3→fourth reservation area RE4. Since the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 are provided in this way, the winning history of the game balls to the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34 can be held and stored up to a maximum of four. In addition, the holding area RE is provided with a holding number storage area NA, and in order to specify the number of the holding history of the winning history to the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34, which is held in the holding number storage area NA. Information is stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the main display portion 43, and at the start of one game time. On the basis of various numerical information stored in the execution area AE, determination of winning/prohibition, jackpot type allocation, and determination of variable display time are performed.

<Various processes executed by main controller 81>
Next, a timer interrupt process and a normal process executed by the MPU 202 in the main control device 81 to advance a game at each game time will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 202 executes a main process which is started when the power is turned on and an NMI interrupt process which is started by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). However, description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This processing is activated by the MPU 202 periodically (for example, in a cycle of 2 msec).

In step S101, a process of reading various winning switches is executed. That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 81 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Then, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204. In a succeeding step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when they reach their maximum values, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 204. After that, in step S104, the winning process for the working port associated with the winning of the working ports 33 and 34 is executed, and in step S105, the winning process for the through component associated with the winning of the through gate 35 is executed. , This timer interrupt processing ends.

The winning process for the working opening in step S104 and the winning process for through in step S105 will be described below.

<Winning process for working port>
First, the winning process for the operating port will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the winning process for the operating port, first, in step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the upper operating port 33 or the lower operating port 34. When the game ball has not won a prize in either the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34, the main winning process is ended as it is. When the game ball has won in either the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34, in step S202, the value stored in the reserved number storage area NA of the reserved ball storage area 232 is read out and reserved. It is determined whether or not the number N of start-up suspension balls stored in the area RE is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the present embodiment).

When the number N of starting reserved balls is equal to or more than the upper limit value, the main winning process is ended as it is. When the number N of starting reserved balls is less than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S203, and the number N of starting reserved balls is incremented (added) by one. In the following step S204, the respective values (numerical value information) of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the previous step S103 are set among the empty holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE. The data is stored in the first holding area, that is, the holding area corresponding to the number of holding storages incremented by 1 in step S203.

In subsequent steps S205 and S206, the voice lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212 are caused to recognize that the winning of the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34 has occurred, and the display control device 212 executes the holding notice. The confirmation processing for holding notice and the setting processing of the holding command, which are the processings to perform the processing, are executed. After that, the main winning process ends.

Below, the confirmation process for the reservation notice and the setting process of the suspension command will be described.

First, the confirmation process for the notice of suspension in step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the confirmation process for the notice of holding, in step S301, the information of the number of holdings stored in the holding number storage area NA in the holding area RE is read, and the information of the number of holdings is stored in the register of the MPU 202. In the following step S302, it is obtained from the jackpot determination information, that is, the information updated by the jackpot random number counter C1 among the holding information obtained in step S204 based on the current winning of the upper opening 33 or the lower opening 34. Understand information.

In a succeeding step S303, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the RAM 204, so that it is determined whether or not the current winning/discarding lottery mode is the low probability mode. In the case of the low probability mode, in step S304, the jackpot determination information grasped in step S302 is set as the jackpot win with reference to the win/loss table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. Specified information is included in the information. Further, in the case of the high-probability mode, in step S305, the jackpot determination information grasped in step S302 is referred to as the jackpot win with reference to the hit table for the high-probability mode shown in FIG. Specify whether it is included in the set information.

After step S304 or step S305, in step S306, it is determined whether or not the information for jackpot determination grasped in step S302 corresponds to jackpot winning. If the jackpot is won, in step S307, the type determination information, that is, the jackpot, of the holding information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning of the upper working opening 33 or the lower working opening 34 The information acquired from the information updated by the type counter C2 is grasped.

In the following step S308, the jackpot type determination information grasped in step S307 is set as the normal jackpot result or the information set as the probability variation jackpot result, with reference to the distribution table shown in FIG. 10B. Which of the following is included? After that, in step S309, it is determined whether or not the information for the jackpot type recognized in step S307 corresponds to the normal jackpot result. If it corresponds to the normal jackpot result, in step S310, the normal jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 202, and if it corresponds to the jackpot result, in step S311, it is changed to the register of the MPU 202. Remember big hit information.

If a negative determination is made in step S306, the process of step S310 is executed, or the process of step S311 is executed, the process proceeds to step S312. In step S312, information is acquired from the hold reach information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning in the upper operation opening 33 or the lower operation opening 34, for information on the out-reach determination, that is, the information updated by the reach random number counter C3. Understand information.

In the following step S313, the reach determined in step S312 is referred to with reference to the reach determination table (reach determination information group) stored in the reach determination table storage area (reach determination information group storage means) of the ROM 203. It is specified whether the information for judgment is included in the information set as the reach winning. Then, in step S314, it is determined whether the information for reach determination grasped in step S312 corresponds to the occurrence of reach. When the reach occurrence is supported, the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S315, and then the present confirmation processing is ended. When the reach occurrence is not supported, the present confirmation processing is ended as it is.

Next, the process of setting the hold command in step S206 in the winning process for the operating port (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the hold command setting process, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the normal jackpot information or the probability variation jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 202, and thus the confirmation process for the previous hold notice (FIG. 13) is performed. ), it is determined whether or not the information for jackpot determination is identified as corresponding to jackpot winning. If either the normal jackpot information or the probability variation jackpot information is stored, it is determined in step S402 whether or not it is the probability variation jackpot information, and the confirmation processing for the previous pending notice (Fig. In 13), it is determined whether or not the information for determining the type is identified as corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result.

When it is the probability variation big hit information, the probability variation correspondence holding command is set in step S403, and when it is the normal big hit information, the normal correspondence holding command is set in step S404. The setting of the above commands and the setting of various commands described later are performed by storing command information in a command setting area provided in the RAM 204.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S401 that both the normal jackpot information and the probability variation jackpot information are not stored, the process proceeds to step S405, and it is determined whether the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 202. As a result, it is determined whether or not the information for reach determination has been identified as corresponding to the occurrence of the reach in the confirmation process (FIG. 13) for the previous notice of suspension. If the reach occurrence information is stored, the detachment-retaining hold command is set in step S406. If the reach occurrence information is not stored, the complete detachment-holding command is set in step S407. To do.

After executing any one of the processes of step S403, step S404, step S406 or step S407, in step S408, a process of setting the information of the number of holdings for the holding command is executed. As such processing, specifically, the information on the hold command set as described above is configured as information of a plurality of bytes, and for some of the bits, information indicating that the command is a hold command and the hold command are included. The information of the type is included and the information of the number of holdings can be set. In this case, in step S408, first, the information on the number of holdings stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S401 in the confirmation processing for holding reservation notice immediately before (FIG. 13) is read, and then the holding command already set. The information of the read-out reserve number is stored in the bit for the information of the reserve number in (1) by arithmetic processing such as logical sum. As a result, with respect to the hold command set in any of the processing of step S403, step S404, step S406, or step S407, the number of hold information corresponding to the hold command is specified. Information is included.

After the processing of step S408 is executed, this setting processing ends. The hold command including the information on the hold number in step S408 is transmitted to the voice lamp controller 82 by the external output process in step S601 in the next normal process (FIG. 16). The voice lamp control device 82 identifies that the hold information has increased by receiving the hold command. Further, the voice lamp control device 82 transmits the hold command as it is to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 executes the processing for holding notice based on the received holding command. The process will be described in detail later.

The method of setting the hold command is to specify the presence or absence of a jackpot win in the display control device 212, the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot win, and the presence or absence of a reach in the case of no jackpot win. It is optional as long as it can. For example, a combination of the probability change pending command, the normal pending command, the detach reach pending command, and the complete detach pending command are set individually for each pending quantity. It is also possible to have a configuration in which one hold command is selected according to the confirmation result in the confirmation process for confirmation (FIG. 13).

<Through winning process>
Next, the through winning process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S501, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the through gate 35. When it is determined that the game ball has won the through gate 35, the process proceeds to step S502, and it is determined whether or not the number of stored accessory storages SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment).

On the condition that the game ball wins the through gate 35, and the number of stored accessory storages SN<4, the process proceeds to step S503, and the number of stored accessory storages SN is incremented by one. In a succeeding step S504, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in the step S103 is stored in the first free storage area of the electric duty holding area 233 of the RAM 204. Then, after turning on the third hold lamp section 47 of the variable display unit 36 corresponding to the number of held memories, the main winning process is ended. The third holding lamp unit 47 is adapted to be sequentially turned on from the left side. For example, if the number SN of stored accessory characters is 1, the third holder lamp unit 47 at the left end is illuminated and the number SN of stored accessory objects is set. If it is 4, all the third hold lamp units 47 are turned on.

On the other hand, if it is not determined in step S501 that the game ball has won the through-gate 35, or if it is determined in step S502 that the value of the number of stored service objects stored SN is not less than the upper limit value, the electric accessory release counter C4 This winning process is ended without storing the value of.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline thereof, the processing of steps S601 to S607 is executed as a regular processing of a 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating processing of steps S608 and S609 is executed in the remaining time.

In the normal processing, in step S601, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt processing or the previous normal processing is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence/absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97. Further, when a production command such as a variation command, a type command, or a variation end command is set, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 82.

Next, in step S602, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

In a succeeding step S603, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 97 are read. Then, in a step S604, a game time control process for controlling the game in each game time is executed. In this game time control process, jackpot determination, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the main display unit 43, and the like are performed. Details of the game number control process will be described later.

Then, in step S605, a game state transition process for transitioning the game state is executed. Although the details will be described later, the game state shift processing causes the game state to shift to the open/close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like.

In step S606, electric power support processing for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower operation port 34 is executed. In this electric power support processing, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is to be opened, and display control of the accessory display unit 44 is performed. The details of the process for supporting the power combination will be described later.

In a succeeding step S607, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal processing. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process (steps S608 and S609). That is, in step S608, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204. In step S609, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

Here, since the execution time of each processing of steps S601 to S606 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal processing is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be updated at random by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time. The fluctuation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game time control process of step S604 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17, first, in step S701, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode is in effect. When in the open/close execution mode, the process of step S702 and thereafter, that is, the game time start process of steps S703 to S705 and the game time progression process of steps S706 to S709 are not executed, and the main game time is executed. The control process ends.

If it is not in the open/close execution mode, it is determined in step S702 whether or not the main display unit 43 is in the variable display. If the main display portion 43 is not in the variable display, the process proceeds to the game times start process of steps S703 to S705. In the game time starting process, first, in step S703, it is determined whether or not the number N of start-up holding balls is "0". The case where the number N of starting reserved balls is "0" means that the reserved information is not stored in the reserved ball storage area 232. Therefore, this game time control processing is ended as it is.

If the number N of starting reserved balls is not "0", a data setting process for setting the data stored in the reserved area RE of the reserved ball storage area 232 for variable display is executed in step S704, Further, in step S705, the variation start processing for starting the variation display on the main display portion 43 and the variation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed, and then the present game number control processing is ended.

Here, the data setting process of step S704 and the fluctuation start process of step S705 will be described in detail below.

First, the data setting process of step S704 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the data setting process, first, in step S801, the number N of starting reserved balls is decremented by one. In subsequent step S802, the data stored in first holding area RE1 of holding area RE is moved to execution area AE.

Then, in step S803, a process of shifting the data (that is, the hold information) stored in each of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first holding area RE1 to the fourth holding area RE4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first holding area RE1 and The data in each area is shifted in the order of holding area RE2→first holding area RE1, third holding area RE3→second holding area RE2, fourth holding area RE4→third holding area RE3.

In a succeeding step S804, a shift command which is information for causing the voice lamp control device 82 to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted is set. Then, this data setting process is completed. The shift command set in step S804 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 82 in step S601 in the normal process (FIG. 16). Upon receiving the shift command, the voice lamp control device 82 executes a process for changing the display on the first holding lamp unit 45 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holdings.

Next, the fluctuation start process of step S705 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the variation start process, first, in step S901, a win/loss determination process for determining whether or not the pending information corresponding to the current variation start process corresponds to the jackpot win. Specifically, of the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for jackpot determination, that is, the information acquired from the information updated by the jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped. Then, when the winning/winning lottery mode is the low-probability mode, it is determined whether or not the above-recognized information is included in the information corresponding to the jackpot winning, by referring to the winning/failing table for the low-probability mode in the ROM 203. When the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the win/loss table for the high-probability mode in the ROM 203 is referred to, and it is specified whether or not the information ascertained above is included in the information corresponding to the jackpot win.

In a succeeding step S902, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/loss determination process in step S901 corresponds to the jackpot winning. If the result corresponds to the jackpot, the type determination process is executed in step S903.

In the type determination process, information for type determination of the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, information acquired from the information updated by the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Further, the distribution table in the ROM 203 is referred to, and it is specified whether or not the information for the type determination as grasped above is included in the information corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result.

In the following step S904, it is determined whether or not the type of the jackpot winning this time is a probability variation jackpot result, based on the information identified in the type determination processing in step S903. If it is the probability variation jackpot result, the stop result setting processing for probability variation jackpot is executed in step S905, and if it is not the probability variation jackpot result, the stop result setting processing for normal jackpot is executed in step S906. If it is determined in step S902 that the jackpot is not a big hit, a stop result setting process for out-of-coupling is executed in step S907.

In each of the stop result setting processes of steps S905 to S907, the information of the mode of the pattern finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 is specified from the information stored in advance in the ROM 203, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 204. Remember. In addition, in step S905 and step S906, the MPU 202 stores information for specifying in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204 that the hit determination result of this game time is the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result. The information of "1" is stored in the corresponding area). Specifically, the probability variation big hit flag is stored in step S905, and the normal big hit flag is stored in step S906.

After executing any one of steps S905 to S907, a variable display time setting process is executed in step S908.

In the variable display time setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 20, first in step S1001, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 231 of the RAM 204 is acquired. , MPU 202 registers.

In a succeeding step S1002, it is determined whether or not reach display is generated on the symbol display device 41 in the current game time. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204. If any of the flags is stored, it is determined that the reach display has occurred, and a positive determination is made in step S1002. Further, even if none of the above flags are stored, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, the reach display is generated. As a result, an affirmative decision is made in step S1002. It should be noted that the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 203 is referred to when the presence or absence of the reach occurrence is specified using the value of the reach random number counter C3.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S1002, then in step S1003 the value of the fluctuation type counter CS for this time is referred to by referring to the reach display variable display time table stored in the variable display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203. The variable display time information corresponding to is acquired, and in step S1004, the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter area (variable display time measuring means) provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. Then, this setting process is completed.

Here, the reach display is provided with a normal reach display and a super reach display which are different in variable display mode from each other. In the reach display variable display time table, the variable display time information corresponding to each of the normal reach display and the super reach display is set, and by referring to the table, the variable display time information corresponding to each reach display is displayed. To be acquired. Regarding the determination of the reach display type, a table in which the reach display type and the value of the variation type counter CS correspond to each other is provided. By referring to the table, the value of the variation type counter CS can be set. The corresponding reach display is determined.

Further, the reach display variable display time table corresponds to the type of jackpot. Specifically, in the case of a probability variation jackpot result, the variable display time is set so that the combination of specific symbols can be stopped and displayed, and in the case of a normal jackpot result, the combination of non-specific symbols can be stopped and displayed. The variable display time is set to. Details will be described later.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1002, the reach non-occurrence variable display time table stored in the variable display time table storage area 223 is referred to in step S1005 to refer to the current variation type counter CS. The variable display time corresponding to the value is acquired, and in step S1006, the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter area. Then, this setting process is completed.

The variable display time information when the reach is not generated is set such that the larger the number N of start pending balls, the shorter the variable display time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the configuration may be such that it does not depend on the number of start-up holding balls N, and the smaller the number of start-up holding balls N is, the shorter the variable display time is set. Good. In addition, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the reach non-reach time is selected so that a shorter variable display time is selected than in the case of the low-frequency support mode when the number of hold information is the same. Although the variable display time table for generation is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variable display time may be the same or may be the reverse of the above relationship. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when the reach occurs, and the variable display time that is easily selected and the variable display time that is difficult to be selected are different between when the jackpot is won and when the reach is lost. It may be configured. Further, the variable display time table for the probability variable big hit, the variable display time table for the normal big hit, the variable display time table for the out-reach, and the variable display time table for the complete out-of-range may be individually set.

As described above, the variable display time of each game time is determined using the presence/absence of the reach, the type of the reach display, the number of hold information, and the value of the variable type counter as parameters. However, the variable display time of each game time, the content of the other holding information, specifically, the jackpot determination information, the type determination information and the reach determination information included in the other holding information are used as parameters. It is decided without doing.

Returning to the description of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 19 ), after executing the fluctuation display time setting process in step S908, the fluctuation command and the type command are set in step S909. The variation command includes information regarding whether or not reach has occurred and information regarding variation display time. Further, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command includes, as the game result information, the probability variation jackpot result information, the normal jackpot result information, the misalignment result information, and the like.

The variation command and the type command set in step S909 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 82 in step S601 in the normal process (FIG. 16). The voice lamp control device 82 determines the light emission pattern of the display lamp section 63 and the sound output pattern from the speaker section 64 in the game time based on the received variation command and type command, and the content of the determined effect. The display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled so that Further, the voice lamp control device 82 transmits the variation command and the type command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form. In the display control device 212, based on the received variation command and type command, the variable display pattern on the symbol display device 41 in the game is determined, and the symbol display device is executed so that the determined variable display pattern is executed. Display control of 41 is performed. After that, in step S910, the variable display of the pattern is started on the main display section 43, and then this fluctuation start process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of the game time control process (FIG. 17 ), when the main display portion 43 is being variably displayed, the game time progression process of steps S706 to S709 is executed. In the game time progression process, first, in step S706, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 204 has become “0”. The value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process (FIG. 20) as described above. Further, the value of the set variable display time information is decremented (decreased) every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is started.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S707. In the variable display process, the display mode on the main display unit 43 is changed. Then, this game time control processing is ended.

If the variation display time has elapsed, variation end processing is executed in step S708. In the fluctuation ending process, the information stored in the RAM 204 in any of the processes in steps S905 to S907 is specified, and the main display is performed so that the mode of the pattern corresponding to the information is displayed on the main display unit 43. The display of the unit 43 is controlled.

In a succeeding step S709, a fluctuation end command is set. Then, this game time control processing is ended. The fluctuation end command set in step S709 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 82 in step S601 in the normal process (FIG. 16). The voice lamp control device 82 transmits the received fluctuation end command to the display control device 212 while maintaining its information form. In the display control device 212, by receiving the variation end command, the combination of final stop symbols in the game time is fixedly displayed (final stop display).

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing of step S605 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 21, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether the open/close execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening/closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S1102, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variable display of the pattern on the main display portion 43 of one game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the game state transition process is finished as it is.

If it is the timing when the variable display ends, it is determined in step S1103 whether or not the game result of the current game time corresponds to the shift to the open/close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RAM 204 stores either the normal jackpot flag or the probability variation jackpot flag. If none of the above flags are stored, the game state transition processing is ended.

If any of the above flags is stored, "15" is set in the round counter area RC provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S1104. The round counter area RC is a counter area for counting the number of times the special winning opening 32a is opened. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is not in the open/close execution mode, an affirmative decision is made in step S1101 and the operation proceeds to step S1105. In step S1105, a special winning opening/closing process is executed. In the special winning opening/closing process, when the special winning opening 32a is closed, the variable winning driving unit 32c is driven on condition that the round counter area RC is "1" or more. The mouth 32a is opened. When the special winning opening 32a is open, the variable winning drive is performed on condition that a predetermined time has elapsed from the opening of the special winning opening 32a or that a predetermined number of game balls have been won. The driving state of the portion 32c is stopped and the special winning opening 32a is closed.

In a succeeding step S1106, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter area RC is "0". When the value of the round counter area RC is not "0", the game state transition processing is ended as it is. If the value of the round counter area RC is “0”, the transition process at the end of the open/close execution mode is executed in step S1107.

In the transition processing at the end of the opening/closing execution mode, when the probability variation jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204, the win/loss lottery mode is set to the high probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next big win. When the RAM 204 stores the normal jackpot flag, the win/loss lottery mode is set to the low-probability mode and the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode. However, the high frequency support mode is ended when the number of game times has continued 100 times, and then the normal game state in which the winning/winning lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode is entered.

After that, in step S1108, after executing the ending process of the open/close execution mode, the present game state transition process is ended. In the ending process of the opening/closing execution mode, the stored flag of the normal jackpot flag or the probability variation jackpot flag is erased.

<Processing for electric power support>
Next, the power combination support process of step S606 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 22 and 23.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not support is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the supported flag is stored in the supported flag storage area provided in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. The in-support flag is a flag that is stored when the electric accessory 34a of the lower operation port 34 is opened, and is erased when it is returned to the closed state.

If the in-support flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1202, and it is determined whether or not the support win flag is stored in the support win flag storage area provided in the other flag storage area 235 of the RAM 204. The support winning flag is a flag that is stored when the open winning is achieved in the lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, and is deleted when the supporting flag is stored.

If the support winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S1203, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer area T2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 is "0". When the value of the second timer area T2 is not "0", the main electric power supporting process is ended as it is.

When the value of the second timer area T2 is "0", it is determined in step S1204 whether it is the end timing of the variable display of the pattern on the accessory display unit 44. If it is the end timing of the variable display, in step S1205, after setting the off display, the processing for main electric power support is ended. By setting the detachment display, the variable display of the pattern on the accessory display unit 44 is terminated with the detachment display stopped.

If the value of the second timer area T2 is "0" and it is not the end timing of the variable display, it is determined in step S1206 whether the value of the number of stored accessory products stored SN is larger than "0". When the value of the number of saved accessory objects SN is "0", the processing for main electric power support is ended as it is. When the value of the number of stored accessory objects SN is larger than “0”, it is determined in step S1207 whether the open/close execution mode is in progress, and in step S1208 whether the high frequency support mode is in effect. ..

If the open/close execution mode is not set and the high frequency support mode is set, open lottery is performed in step S1209. Specifically, when the value stored in the accessory holding ball storage area is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, it is determined that the winning lottery is won. Become. At the same time as the open lottery, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer area T2. The second accessory timer area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

In a succeeding step S1210, it is determined whether or not the result of the open lottery in step S1209 is a support win. If it is not a support win, the process proceeds to step S1212 without executing the process of step S1211, and if it is a support win, the support win flag is stored in step S1211 and provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. After setting "3" in the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S1212.

In step S1212, it is determined whether or not the winning/winning lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1212, the processing for main electric power support is ended as it is. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1212, it is determined in step S1213 whether or not the game number counter area is "0". The number-of-games counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is completed in the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. When the number-of-games counter area is not "0", the processing for main electric power support is finished as it is. If the number-of-games counter area is "0", the high-frequency support flag is erased in step S1214, and then the main electric power support process is ended.

If it is the open/close execution mode or is not the high frequency support mode, an open lottery is performed in step S1215. Specifically, when the value stored in the accessory holding ball storage area is shifted and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, it is determined that the winning lottery is won. Become. At the same time as the open lottery, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer area T2.

In a succeeding step S1216, it is determined whether or not the result of the open lottery in the step S1215 is support winning. If the support is not won, the processing for main electric power support is finished as it is. In the case of support winning, the support winning flag is stored in step S1217, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2, and then the processing for main electric power support is ended.

If the support winning flag is stored, an affirmative decision is made in step S1202, and the operation proceeds to step S1218 to decide whether or not the value of the second timer area T2 is "0". When the value of the second timer area T2 is not "0", the variation display of the pattern is being displayed on the accessory display unit 44, and the processing for supporting the electric power combination is ended as it is. When the value of the second timer area T2 is "0", the hit display is set in step S1219. As a result, the variable display of the pattern on the accessory display unit 44 is terminated with the hit display stopped. In a succeeding step S1220, the in-support flag is stored and the support winning flag is erased, and then the processing for supporting the electric power combination is ended.

If the in-support flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1221, and after the electric-role combination opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory 34a is executed, the main-electric-role combination support process ends. The power combination opening/closing control process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 34b is in a driving state. When the electric accessory 34a is opened, the process proceeds to step S1302, and it is determined whether the value of the second timer area T2 is "0".

If the value of the second timer area T2 is not "0", the main electric power combination opening/closing process is ended as it is. When the value of the second timer area T2 is "0", the process proceeds to step S1303, a closing process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the closed state is performed, and "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer area T2. ) Is set.

After that, in step S1304, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, and then in step S1305, it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. If the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0", the main power combination opening/closing process is ended as it is, and if the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0", the in-support flag is erased. After that, the main power combination opening/closing process is ended.

On the other hand, when the electric accessory 34a is open, a positive determination is made in step S1301 and the process proceeds to step S1307. In step S1307, it is determined whether the second timer area T2 is "0". When the second timer area T2 is not "0", the main power combination opening/closing process is ended as it is. When the second timer area T2 is "0", in step S1308, an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the open state is executed.

After that, in step S1309, it is determined whether or not the open/close execution mode is in effect, and in step S1310, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If the open/close execution mode is not set and the high-frequency support mode is set, "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer area T2 in step S1311, and then the main power combination opening/closing process is ended. On the other hand, if the open/close execution mode is not set or the high-frequency support mode is not set, "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the second timer area T2 in step S1312, and then the main power combination open/close process is ended. ..

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212>
Next, the electrical configurations of the voice lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212 will be described below with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 242 is mounted on the voice lamp control board 241 provided in the voice lamp control device 82. The MPU 242 is a ROM 243 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 242 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 243 is executed. The RAM 244 is an element including an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. It is not essential that the ROM 243 and the RAM 244 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 242, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main controller 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242. From the main control device 81, the above-described hold display control commands (hold display control information) such as the operation winning command, the shift command, the special advantageous start command, and the special advantageous end command are received. Also, it receives a game time control command (game time control information) such as a change command, a type command, and a change end command. It also receives an opening/closing execution mode command (opening/closing execution mode information) such as an opening command and an ending command.

As described above, the holding lamps 45 to 47 provided in the variable display unit 36 and the display lamps 63 and the speaker 64 provided in the front door frame 14 are connected to the output side of the MPU 242. At the same time, the display control device 212 is connected. The MPU 242 of the voice lamp control device 82 transmits the command for determining the variable display pattern received from the main control device 81 and the command related to the hold notice to the display control device 212 as they are.

The display control device 212 includes a display control board 251 on which an MPU 252, which is an element in which a program ROM 253 and a work RAM 254 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 256, and a video RAM 257 are mounted. Equipped with. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 253 and the work RAM 254 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 252, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

The MPU 252 of the display control device 212 determines a variable display pattern of each game time in the symbol display device 41 based on receiving a command from the main control device 81 via the voice lamp control device 82, and gives a notice of suspension. The processing is executed, and the drawing processing is executed on the video RAM 257 in the VDP 255 according to the processing result, so that various images are displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. In these processes, various information stored in each area 311 to 320 of the ROM 253 is used and each area 321 to 334 of the RAM 254 is used. Details of these areas will be described together with the description of the processing executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212.

The VDP 255 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 255 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and the substance thereof should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 255 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 252, the video RAM 257 and the like to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and also reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 257 from the character ROM 256 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 256 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 41. The character ROM 256 holds bit map format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color at each dot of the bit map image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 256 and share the character ROMs 256 to store image data and the like. Further, the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 253 may be stored in the character ROM 256.

The video RAM 257 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 257.

<Regarding Command Correspondence Processing Executed by Display Control Device 212>
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 will be described. The processes executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 are roughly classified into a hold command handling process and a variable display control process. Therefore, these processes will be described below.

<Hold command handling>
The pending command handling process will be described below. The hold command handling process is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle). In the hold command handling process, when the hold command transmitted by the main control device 81 is received, the process corresponding to the information included in the received hold command is executed.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 25, in the hold command handling process, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the probability variation support command or the normal support command is received. Here, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 receives the command from the voice lamp control device 82, and the received command is temporarily stored in the command storage area 321 of the work RAM 254. The command storage area 321 is configured as a ring buffer that can individually store a plurality of commands and can be read from the previously stored commands. Even if a plurality of commands are received at the same time, The processing corresponding to each command can be satisfactorily executed. At the time of determination in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the probability change corresponding pending command or the normal corresponding pending command is received in the current read target area in the command storage area 321. Note that the configuration of reading the command is the same in the following command reading.

When the probability variation pending command or the normal pending command is received, in step S1502 the information on the number of holdings included in the command received this time is specified, and the information on the specified number of holdings is provided in the work RAM 254. The erased counter area 322 is set. In a succeeding step S1503, it is determined whether or not the big hit holding flag (big hit holding information) is stored in the big hit holding flag storage area (big hit holding information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 334 of the work RAM 254. If the jackpot holding flag is stored, this handling process is ended as it is, and if the jackpot holding flag is not stored, the jackpot holding flag is stored in step S1504.

Here, the jackpot holding flag means that when the holding information held and stored in the main control device 81 includes holding information corresponding to the jackpot winning, it is set by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212. This is information for specifying. When the jackpot holding flag is stored, even if the probability variation holding command or the normal handling holding command is received, an affirmative decision is made in step S1503, and various settings are made for making a holding notice. The correspondence setting process was not executed. As a result, even if the main controller 81 has already stored the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win, even if the hold information acquired based on the new winning of the operation openings 33 and 34 corresponds to the jackpot win. , Various settings are not made to issue the hold notice.

Further, the erasing counter area 322 is a measuring means for specifying the timing of erasing the jackpot holding flag when the jackpot holding flag is stored. As will be described later, the information on the number of holdings set in the erasing counter area 322 is updated so as to be decremented by 1 each time a new game is started, and is updated in the erasing counter area 322 after updating. When the stored information is "0" which is the initial value, the jackpot holding flag erasing process is executed.

After storing the jackpot holding flag in step S1504, in step S1505, the advance notice is stored in the advance notice condition satisfaction flag storage area (preliminary condition satisfaction information storage means or notification condition satisfaction information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 334 of the work RAM 254. It is determined whether or not a condition satisfaction flag (advance condition satisfaction information or notification condition satisfaction information) is stored. The notice condition fulfillment flag is information for identifying by the MPU 252 whether or not the situation has already been set to issue the notice for hold, and is stored when the condition for executing the notice for hold is satisfied, This information is erased when the condition for ending the pending notice is satisfied.

If the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored, an affirmative decision is made in step S1505, and this processing ends. That is, in a situation in which it is already set to give a notice of holding, even if a probability change holding command or a normal holding command is newly received, various settings are not made for giving a holding notice.

If the advance notice condition establishment flag is not stored, after executing the big hit correspondence setting processing in step S1506, the present correspondence processing ends.

Here, the jackpot correspondence setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the jackpot correspondence setting process, first, in step S1601, a pending notice generation lottery process is executed. In the pending notice occurrence lottery process, the counter value (numerical value information) for the pending notice occurrence lottery is read from the lottery counter area 323 of the work RAM 254. Here, the lottery counter area 323 is configured to be able to store a counter value of “0 to 99”, and is incremented by 1 every time the hold command handling process (FIG. 25) is activated, that is, at a cycle of about 2 msec. The configuration is such that it is initialized to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In the pending notice occurrence lottery process, the lottery table (notice lottery information group) stored in the lottery table storage area (preliminary lottery information group storage means) 311 of the program ROM 253 is referred to and read out. It is determined whether or not the counter value for the pending notice occurrence lottery corresponds to the pending notice occurrence lottery. The probability of winning the reservation notice is arbitrary, but in the pachinko machine 10, the lottery table is set such that the probability of winning the reservation notice is 7/10 in the case of the jackpot handling setting process. ..

In a succeeding step S1602, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in the above step S1601 is the winning of the reservation notice. If it is not the winning of the notice of hold, the present setting process is terminated. In the case of a pending notice occurrence win, the process advances to step S1603.

In step S1603, it is determined whether or not the hold command received this time is a normal correspondence hold command. In the case of the normal correspondence hold command, in step S1604, the process of determining the notice symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot is executed. In the determination process of the notice symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, in order to determine the type of symbol to be used in making this pending notice from among the symbols with even numbers that are the main symbols corresponding to the non-specific symbols The process of is executed.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, as described above, in the main control device 81, regarding the variable display of the symbols in each game time, whether or not there is a jackpot win in each game time, and if it is a jackpot win, the type of jackpot result If the jackpot is not won, the presence or absence of the reach and the variable display time at each game time are determined, and at the end of each game time, the type of symbol to be finally stopped and the final stop display are displayed. The variable display patterns up to are determined by the display control device 212. In this case, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 uses the symbol update counter area 324 and the symbol information acquisition area 325 provided in the work RAM 254 so as to determine the type of the symbol finally displayed. There is.

Specifically, the symbol update counter area 324 is provided with a counter area for the upper symbol row, a counter area for the middle symbol row, and a counter area for the lower symbol row, and these counter areas are provided. , A counter value corresponding to the number of symbols set in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the symbol display device 41 is set. That is, in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, as already described, as a total of the main symbol and the sub symbol, 18 symbols are set in correspondence with the upper symbol row counter. A numerical range of "0 to 17" is set in the area and the counter area for the lower symbol row. In addition, in the middle symbol row Z2, as the total number of main symbols and sub symbols, 20 symbols are set, and in the counter area for medium symbol rows, a numerical value of "0 to 19" is set. The range is set. In the counter area for each symbol row, the counter value is updated at a different cycle. Then, in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec), all the information updated in the counter area for each symbol row is acquired, and the acquired information is stored in the symbol information acquisition area 325.

In this case, in the symbol information acquisition area 325, a normal big hit area, a probability variation big hit area, and a complete deviation area are set. Then, it is determined whether or not the information acquired from all the counter areas for each symbol row corresponds to any one of the normal jackpot result, the probability variation jackpot result, and the complete deviation, and among the symbol information acquisition area 325. The information of the corresponding area is updated. When determining the type of the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed for the game time of complete disengagement that is not related to the hold notice, the area for complete disengagement of the symbol information acquisition area 325 is referred to and stored in the referenced area. The symbol display device 41 is display-controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to the information is stopped and displayed on a predetermined activated line.

On the other hand, in the normal reach display of the reach display, when determining the type of the symbol that is finally stopped for the big hit or the missed reach game times, it is stored in the middle symbol row stop result table storage area 312 provided in the program ROM 253. Refer to the middle symbol row stop result table. The middle symbol row stop result table is a table in which the stop result of the middle symbol row is uniquely determined for the variable display time, and the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped according to the variable display time with reference to the table. Identify the results. Then, the stop result according to the stop result and the game result of the identified middle symbol row Z2 is set, and the type of the symbol to be finally stopped is determined. In the process of step S1003 and step S1004 of the variable display time setting process (FIG. 20) described above, in the case of the normal reach display of the probability variation jackpot result, the specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2. The time is set. On the other hand, in the case of the normal reach display of the normal jackpot result, the variable display time in which the non-specific symbols are stopped and displayed is set in the middle symbol row Z2.

Returning to the description of the determination process of the notice symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, in the determination process, the stop result of the middle symbol sequence Z2 is identified by referring to the middle symbol sequence stop result table. Then, the stop result corresponding to the normal jackpot is specified based on the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2. In a succeeding step S1606, information on the type of the symbol relating to the stop result corresponding to the normal jackpot is stored in the type information storage area 326 of the symbol for notice provided in the work RAM 254 as the type information of the symbol for notice.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1603 that the currently received hold command is a probability variation corresponding hold command, in step S1605, a process for determining a notice symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is executed. In the process, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is specified by referring to the middle symbol row stop result table. Then, based on the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, the stop result corresponding to the probability variation big hit is specified. In a succeeding step S1606, information on the type of the symbol relating to the stop result corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is stored in the type information storage area 326 of the symbol for notice as the type information of the symbol for notice.

After executing the process of step S1606, the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254 in step S1607. In a succeeding step S1608, information on the number of holdings included in the currently received holding command is specified, and the information on the specified number of holdings is set in the holding advance notice counter area 327 provided in the work RAM 254. The reservation notice counter area 327 is a measuring means for specifying, in the MPU 252, in which game time the hold information corresponding to the setting corresponds to the hold information when the hold notice is set. .. As will be described later, the information about the number of holdings set in the holding advance notice counter area 327 is updated so as to be decremented by 1 each time a new game is started, and after the update, the holding advance notice counter area is updated. When the information stored in 327 is the initial value "0", the advance notice condition establishment flag is erased, and the state set to give the advance notice is released. After executing the processing of step S1608, the present setting processing ends.

Returning to the explanation of the hold command handling process (FIG. 25), if it is determined in step S1501 that neither the probability variation hold command nor the normal hold command has been received, then in step S1507 the disconnect reach hold It is determined whether the command is received. If the detach reach correspondence hold command has not been received, the present correspondence processing is ended as it is. In other words, in the hold command handling process, among multiple types of hold commands that have been set, a setting is made to give a hold notice when a probability variation hold command, a normal hold command, or a disconnect reach hold command is received. However, if a hold command for complete disconnection is received, the setting for making a hold notice is not made. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, when the setting of the notice of holding is made, when the holding information corresponding to the jackpot winning is acquired based on the winning of the operation openings 33, 34, or the holding information corresponding to the jackpot winning is displayed. Even if it is not acquired, it is limited to the case where the hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the reach is acquired, and when the hold information corresponding to the complete disconnection is acquired, the setting for issuing the hold notice is not performed.

When it is determined in step S1507 that the detachment reach pending command is received, it is determined in step S1508 whether the jackpot pending flag is stored in the work RAM 254. When the jackpot holding flag is stored, this handling process is ended as it is. As a result, in the situation where the main controller 81 has already stored the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win, the hold information acquired based on the new winning of the operation openings 33 and 34 corresponds to the reach occurrence win. However, various settings are not made for issuing the hold notice.

Here, as already described, even when the probability variation pending command or the normal pending command is received, if the jackpot pending flag is stored, the pending command supporting process is terminated as it is. .. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, in the situation where the main controller 81 has already stored the hold information corresponding to the jackpot win, regardless of whether or not it is set to issue the hold notice, Even if a new winning is generated in the operating ports 33, 34, various settings are not made for issuing the hold notice.

When it is determined in step S1508 that the jackpot holding flag is not stored, it is determined in step S1509 whether the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored, an affirmative decision is made in step S1509, and this processing ends. In other words, in a situation where it has already been set to give a notice of holding, even if a release command for hold is newly received, various settings for giving a notice of holding are not made.

Here, as already described, even when the probability variation correspondence hold command or the normal correspondence hold command is received, if the advance notice condition satisfaction flag is stored, the hold command support processing is terminated as it is. did. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the setting for making the notice of holding has already been made, even if a new prize is generated in the operating ports 33, 34, various settings are made for giving a notice of holding. I don't know.

If the advance notice condition establishment flag is not stored, a negative determination is made in step S1509, and in step S1510, the disconnect reach correspondence setting processing is executed, and then this correspondence processing is ended.

Here, the out-reach correspondence setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In the out-reach correspondence setting process, first, in step S1701, a pending notice occurrence lottery process is executed. The processing content of the pending notice occurrence lottery processing is the same as the processing content described in step S1601. However, in the lottery table stored in the lottery table storage area 311, the probability of winning a preliminary announcement is lower in the case of the out-reach correspondence setting process than in the case of the jackpot correspondence setting process (FIG. 26). Is set to be. In the case of such a miss reach reach setting process, the probability of winning the notice of pending reservation is arbitrary, but in the pachinko machine 10, the lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the notice of pending reservation is 1/10. There is.

In a succeeding step S1702, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in the step S1701 is a pending notice occurrence win. If it is not the winning of the notice of hold, the present setting process is terminated. If it is a pending notice occurrence win, the process advances to step S1703.

In step S1703, a process for determining a notice symbol corresponding to the out-reach is executed. In the process, the out-reach area in the symbol information acquisition area 325 is referred to. Then, in a succeeding step S1704, the information about the type of the reach symbol stored in the out-reach area is stored in the notice symbol type information storage area 326 as the notice symbol type information.

After that, in step S1705, the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254. In a succeeding step S1706, information on the number of holdings included in the currently received holding command is specified, and the information on the specified number of holdings is set in the holding advance notice counter area 327. Then, this setting process is completed.

<Variable display control processing>
The variable display control process will be described below. The variable display control process is started after the hold command handling process (FIG. 25) is executed. Then, in the variable display control process, when the variation command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received, the variable display of the symbols for one game is started on the symbol display device 41, and from the main control device 81. When the transmitted variation end command is received, the process of finally displaying the variation display of the symbols is executed. Further, in the variable display control process, a process of appropriately modifying the variable display pattern is executed in accordance with the setting for giving the notice of suspension.

First, the variable display control process when the execution condition of the suspension notice is not satisfied will be described. After that, the variable display control process related to the reservation notice will be described.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 28, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the variable display of symbols for one game is being executed on the symbol display device 41. If the variation display of the symbols for one game is not performed, it is determined in step S1802 whether or not the variation command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received. If the variation command has not been received, this variation display control process is ended as it is. If the variation command is received, the variation display control process is terminated after the variation start process is executed in step S1803.

On the other hand, when the variation display of the symbols for one game is being performed, it is determined in step S1804 whether or not the variation end command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received. If the fluctuation end command is not received, the fluctuation display control processing is ended after the fluctuation change processing is executed in step S1805. If the fluctuation end command is received, the fluctuation end control processing is ended after the fluctuation end processing is executed in step S1806.

Hereinafter, the fluctuation start process of step S1803, the fluctuation change process of step S1805, and the fluctuation end process of step S1806 will be described in detail.

<Variation start processing>
First, the fluctuation start process of step S1803 will be described. The variation start process is a process for starting the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 based on the reception of the variation command transmitted from the main control device 81.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 29, in step S1901, the fluctuation command received this time is read, and the information on the presence or absence of the reach occurrence and the fluctuation display time information are specified from the command. Further, as already described, the main control device 81 also transmits the type command when transmitting the variation command. Therefore, in step S1901, the type command received together with the variation command received this time is read out, and information on the game result such as information on the probability variation jackpot result, information on the normal jackpot result or information on the deviation result is specified from the command. .. Then, in step S1901, from the above-identified information, information on whether or not a jackpot is won, information on a jackpot type if the jackpot is won, information on whether or not a reach is generated if the jackpot is not hit, and a variable display time. Information is stored in the register of the MPU 252.

In a succeeding step S1902, it is determined whether or not the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If it is determined that the notice condition fulfillment flag is not stored, in step S1903 a stop result setting process that does not correspond to the hold notice is executed.

The stop result setting process that does not correspond to the suspension notice will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not a reach display is generated in the current game time. In other words, it is determined whether or not the current game time is a big hit occurrence or a reach occurrence game time. If it is not the game number for which the reach is generated, that is, if the game result is a complete loss result, the process proceeds to step S2002.

In step S2002, stop line determination processing is executed. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, as already described, five effective lines L1 to L5 are set on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, and in the case of a jackpot result, one of the effective lines L1 to L5 is set. The combination of the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed on L5, and when the reach display is displayed even when the jackpot result is not obtained, the reach symbol combination is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines L1 to L5. .. Furthermore, even if neither the jackpot result nor the reach display is given, when the holding notice is given, the combination of the symbols for holding notice is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines. In this case, in the stop line determination process, a process for determining an effective line for stopping and displaying the combination of the respective symbols is executed.

In the stop line determination process, the line information updating area 328 provided in the work RAM 254 is used. Specifically, the line information update area 328 is set with a numerical value range of “0 to 4” corresponding to the number of effective lines L1 to L5, and the counter value of the counter value in the numerical value range is set in a predetermined cycle. The update is executed. In the stop line determination process, the numerical information stored in the line information update area 328 at that time is acquired.

Next, in step S2003, a process for determining a symbol combination is executed. In the process, the information currently stored in the area for complete removal of the symbol information acquisition area 325 is acquired.

Next, the storage process of the address information of the stop information is executed. Specifically, the program ROM 253 is provided with a stop information table storage area 313 as stop information group storage means, and the stop information table storage area 313 stores a stop information table as a stop information group. .. In the stop information table, address information is set in association with the information of each effective line L1 to L5 and the information of the combination of each stop symbol. In the storage process of the address information of the stop information, in the stop information table, the stop information corresponding to the stop line information and the pattern combination information specified this time is specified, and the address information of the specified stop information is set as the stop information. The data is stored in the address storage area 329.

On the other hand, when the reach display is generated, the process proceeds to step S2005, and it is determined whether the type of the reach display this time is the normal reach. If it is not the normal reach, it means that the reach display this time is the super reach display. In this case, the process proceeds to step S2006, and the super-reach stop result setting process is executed. In the process, the stop result corresponding to the game result is determined.

Here, the super reach display is a reach display in which the stop result can be adjusted regardless of the variable display time. As a result, the stop result corresponding to the game result can be stopped and displayed without changing the variable display time. The details of this will be described later. Then, the stop information corresponding to the stop result is specified, and the address information of the specified stop information is stored in the storage area 329 of the stop information address.

On the other hand, if the reach display this time is the normal reach display, an affirmative decision is made in step S2005, the process proceeds to step S2007, and the stop result grasping process for the middle symbol row Z2 is executed from the variable display time. Specifically, it refers to the middle symbol row stop result table. In the middle symbol row stop result table, as shown in FIG. 31, the stop result of each middle symbol row Z2 is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the information of each variable display time, and further to each stop result. It is a table in which address information is set correspondingly. In detail, information indicating which symbol is stopped and displayed is set on any one of the left line L1, the middle line L2, and the right line L3 of the middle symbol row Z2 corresponding to each variable display time. There is. In the stop result grasping process of the middle symbol row Z2, the address information of the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 corresponding to the variable display time is acquired from the middle symbol row stop result table. The detailed relationship between the normal reach display and the variable display time will be described later.

After that, in step S2008, it is determined from the information stored in the register of the MPU 252 whether or not a jackpot win occurs in the current game time.

When a big hit is generated, a stop line determination process is executed in step S2009. In the determination process of the stop line, based on the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the jackpot of the current game times among the probability variation jackpots or the normal jackpots are stopped on any of the activated lines. The stop line information is identified as displayed. Specifically, the line in which the main symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed is specified, and the information of the stop line corresponding to the line is specified. Specifically, when the game result is a normal jackpot result, when it is specified that the non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2, the left line L1 is set to be selected. On the other hand, under the situation that the game result is a probability variation jackpot result, if it is specified that the non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2, the right line L3 is set to be selected. There is. Further, when it is specified that the main symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z, it is set to select one of the middle line L2, the right downward line L4, or the right upward line L5. ing. For the selection, the line information update area 328 used in the stop line determination processing in step S2002 is used.

After that, in step S2010, a process of determining symbols (hereinafter referred to as jackpot symbols) that constitute a combination of jackpot symbols is executed. In the process, the big hit symbol is specified based on the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2. Specifically, in the middle symbol row Z2, the symbols stopped and displayed on the stop line determined in the stop line determination process are set as the jackpot symbol information. For example, when it is specified that the symbol "1" is stopped and displayed on the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the stop line is determined to be the left line L1, the symbol "1" is selected as the jackpot symbol. .. Then, it progresses to step S2011.

In step S2011, a jackpot symbol combination determination process is executed. In the process, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, the stop line determined by the stop line determination process, the jackpot symbol determined by the jackpot symbol determination process, and information on a combination of jackpot symbols according to Specify. Specifically, the program ROM 253 is provided with a combination information table storage area 314, and the combination information table storage area 314 stores a combination information table. The combination information table is a table in which information on the combination of the big hit symbols is set according to the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, the stop line, and the big hit symbol. By referring to the table, information on the combination of symbols is specified.

That is, the combination of the stop line and the jackpot pattern is limited by specifying the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 from the variable display time. That is, the big hit symbol is determined by the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 and the big hit type. As a result, the amount of information stored in advance can be reduced. On the other hand, since the variable display time is randomly determined in the main control device 81, the diversification of the stop result is ensured.

In the case of a normal big hit, the variable display time is set so that at least non-specific symbols (even symbols) are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2. Thereby, the combination of the big hit symbols corresponding to the normal big hit can be stopped and displayed.

Further, in the case of probability variation big hit, the variable display time is set so that at least the specific symbol (odd symbol) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2. This makes it possible to stop and display a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the probability variation jackpot. Regarding the probability variation jackpot, when it is specified that the non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, the combination of the non-specific symbol jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, and the jackpot of the specific symbol during the opening/closing execution mode. It is also possible to separately provide promotion production processing for stopping and displaying the combination of symbols. Thereby, the motivation for the game can be increased.

Then, in step S2012, the storage process of the address information of the stop information is executed. That is, the address information corresponding to the stop line information and the jackpot symbol combination information is read from the stop information table in the stop information table storage area 313, and the read stop information address information is stored in the stop information address storage area 329. To store.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not a big hit in step S2008, it means that the game result is a missed reach result. In this case, the process proceeds to step S2013, and the disengagement normal reach stop result setting process that does not correspond to the suspension notice is executed. In the process, the stop result that is the out-reach result is set without changing the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 32, first, in step S2101, a stop line determination process is executed. In the stop line determination process, a process of determining a reach line to stop and display a combination of reach symbols is executed. Specifically, the numerical information stored in the line information updating area 328 at that time is acquired.

After that, in the processing of steps S2102 to S2105, symbols (hereinafter, reach symbols) that constitute a combination of reach symbols are determined. In this case, the reach symbol and the reach line are determined based on the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 on condition that the combination of the jackpot symbols is not stopped and displayed on all the activated lines.

First, in step S2102, a process of arbitrarily selecting a reach symbol is executed. Specifically, the reach symbol update area 330 provided in the work RAM 254 is used. Specifically, in the reach symbol updating area 330, a numerical range of "0 to 8" is set in correspondence with the numbers of the reach symbols "1" to "9", and the numerical value is set in a predetermined cycle. The counter value is updated in the range. In the reach symbol determination processing, the numerical information stored in the reach symbol update area 330 at that time is acquired.

After that, in step S2103, the jackpot stop line change table stored in the stop line change table storage area 315 provided in the program ROM 253 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 33, the jackpot stop line change table is a table in which a pattern in which a combination of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed is previously extracted from the stop result, reach line, and reach symbol of the middle symbol row Z2. .. In step S2104, it is determined whether or not the combination of the stop result, reach symbol, and reach line in the middle symbol row Z2 of this time corresponds to the combination set in the jackpot stop line change table. As a result, whether or not the stop result of the medium symbol row Z2 selected this time, the reach line, and the stop result determined by the reach symbol are the stop results in which the combination of the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines. Is determined.

If the determination result is negative, the process proceeds to step S2106. On the other hand, if the determination result is affirmative, it means that the combination of the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed, and therefore in step S2105, the reach line changing process is executed. In the process, the reach line is changed so that the combination of the jackpot symbols is not stopped and displayed. Specifically, in the jackpot stop line change table, change reach lines are set according to the combination of the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, the reach symbol, and the reach line. The changed reach line is a reach line set so that the combination of the big hit symbols is not stopped and displayed based on the stop result and the reach symbol in the middle symbol row Z2. In the reach line changing process, the reach line is changed to the changed reach line, and the process proceeds to step S2106.

Instead of changing the reach line, the reach pattern may be changed. Further, when the reach symbol is determined, the reach symbol which is a combination of the jackpot symbols may be excluded in advance according to the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 and the reach line. In short, the stop line and the reach symbol may be determined according to the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, provided that the combination of the jackpot symbols is not stopped and displayed.

In step S2106, a process for determining the combination of reach symbols is executed. In the process, by referring to the combination information table, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, the stop line determined in the stop line determination process or the changed reach line changed in the reach line change process, and the reach. The reach symbol determined by the symbol determination process and the information of the combination of the reach symbol corresponding to the reach symbol are specified. The reach symbol refers to two symbols excluding the middle symbol sequence Z2, and the combination of reach symbols refers to a combination of three symbols including the stop result of the middle symbol sequence Z2.

After that, in step S2107, the storage process of the address information of the stop information is executed. That is, the address information corresponding to the stop line information and the reach symbol combination information is read from the stop information table in the stop information table storage area 313, and the read stop information address information is stored in the stop information address storage area 329. To store.

Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 29 ), after the process of step S1903 is performed, the variation display pattern setting process is performed in step S1904. In the variable display pattern setting process, the variable display pattern table (variable display mode information group) serving as the variable display pattern table storage area (variable display mode information group storage means) 316 provided in the program ROM 253 is referred to, and step S1901 is performed. The information of the variable display pattern corresponding to both the information of the variable display time stored in the register of MPU 252 and the information stored in the storage area 329 of the stop information address in step S1903 is specified.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 34, in the variable display pattern table, the variable display pattern information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with any combination of each variable display time information and each stop information. Further, the address information is set in correspondence with the information of each variable display pattern. In the variable display pattern setting process in step S1904, in the variable display pattern table, the address information corresponding to the combination of the variable display time information and the stop information already specified this time is specified, and the specified address information is set to the work. It is stored in the storage area 331 of the pattern information address provided in the RAM 254.

By storing the address information of the variable display pattern in the storage area 331 of the pattern information address, the MPU 252 generates an internal command for the VDP 255 by an internal command output process (not shown) different from the variable start process. Then, the symbol display device 41 is driven so that the variable display of the symbols corresponding to the variable display pattern set this time is performed. In this case, the output process of the internal command is repeatedly started in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec), and in the output process of the internal command, the internal command according to the information of the set variable display pattern is displayed as a pattern. It is generated according to the elapsed time from the start of the variable display, and the generated internal command is output to the VDP 255. In the VDP 255, the image data is read from the character ROM 256 according to the internal command, and the read image data is written in the video RAM 257. As a result, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display of symbols corresponding to the variable display pattern set this time.

The information of the variable display pattern stored in the variable display pattern table is not only the content of the variable display of the symbol, but also the information of the background image displayed together with the variable display of the symbol and the reach effect. It also contains information about the image for reach production. Therefore, by outputting the internal command corresponding to the set variation display pattern to the VDP 255, the background image is displayed together with the variation display of the symbol, and further, when various productions such as reach production are performed, The effect image is displayed.

However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and it is distinguished into the information of the symbol display pattern (first display pattern information) and the information of other display patterns (second display pattern information), and the information of the symbol display pattern is the symbol. It may be configured such that only the information of the variable display mode is included, and the information of the other display patterns includes the information of the background image and the information of the image of the reach effect when the reach effect is performed. In this case, when modifying the variable display pattern described later, both the information of the symbol display pattern and the information of other display patterns may be modified, or only the information of the symbol display pattern may be modified. Furthermore, the information of the symbol display pattern is individually for each of the upper symbol sequence Z1 as the first symbol sequence, the middle symbol sequence Z2 as the second symbol sequence, and the lower symbol sequence Z3 as the third symbol sequence. The configuration may be set. In this case, when modifying the variable display pattern, which will be described later, only the information of the symbol display pattern of the symbol row to be modified may be modified.

Here, the variable display pattern of the reach display will be described. First, the normal reach display will be described with reference to FIG. 35, and then the super reach display will be described.

In the normal reach display, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is uniquely determined from the variable display time by executing the output process of the internal command so as to be the variable display described below.

In detail, when the fluctuation starts first, as shown in FIG. 35(a), it becomes impossible or difficult to identify each symbol displayed in the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in appearance. High-speed fluctuation display (or first speed display) is executed. After that, when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, first, for the upper symbol row Z1, high speed so that the identification of each symbol displayed in the display screen G in the upper symbol row Z1 becomes easy in appearance. The variable display is switched to the low speed variable display (or the second speed display which is slower than the first speed display). After that, as shown in FIG. 35(b), the variable display in the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped, and, for the lower symbol row Z3, identification of each symbol displayed in the display screen G in the lower symbol row Z3. The display can be switched from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display so that the appearance is easy. Then, as shown in FIG. 35C, the variable display in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped. In this case, the same symbol is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3. This timing is called the reach generation timing.

At the reach occurrence timing, in the middle symbol row Z2, switching from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display is performed so that the identification of each symbol displayed in the display screen G in the middle symbol row Z2 becomes easy in appearance. At the same time, the symbol position adjusting process is executed. In the position adjustment processing of the symbol, at the timing of switching from the high-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display, the symbol position of the middle symbol row Z2 is adjusted so that the symbol "1" of the middle symbol row Z2 passes through the middle line L2. R. Specifically, an internal command for reaching the position of the predetermined symbol is output to the VDP 255 at a timing when a predetermined period (6 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of fluctuation. This predetermined period is set to be the same as the period from the fluctuation start timing to the reach generation timing. The position adjustment process of the symbol is always executed when the reach display occurs. More specifically, the process of creating such an internal command is incorporated in the variation pattern for reach display. That is, the position of the symbol "1" in the middle symbol row Z2 at the reach occurrence timing is the same in any reach display. In other words, the display mode of the middle symbol row Z2 at the start timing (reach occurrence timing) of the low speed fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2 is fixed.

Further, the period from the start of fluctuation to the reach generation timing is a constant period regardless of the stop result. Further, in the low-speed fluctuation display, until the fluctuation end command is received (until the fluctuation display time elapses), at a constant speed (in the present embodiment, the fluctuation display for one symbol is performed in 0.5 seconds). A variable display is displayed. As a result, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is uniquely determined from the variable display time. For example, when the main controller 81 sets that the variable display time is 16 seconds, it takes 6 seconds before the reach occurrence timing, that is, the variable display of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped. Since it takes 9.5 (=0.5×19) seconds for the symbol “1” in the middle symbol column Z2 to reach the middle line L2 again after the variable display of the symbol column Z3 is stopped, a total of 15.5. Since it takes seconds, the remaining time is 0.5 seconds. Therefore, as shown in the middle symbol stop result information table of FIG. 31, the symbol "1" is stopped at the position left by one symbol from the middle line L2, that is, the left line L1.

From the above, in the case of the reach display, the period from the fluctuation start timing to the low speed fluctuation display start timing is set to be constant, and the mode of the middle symbol row Z2 at the start timing of the low speed fluctuation display is uniquely determined. Since the variable display speed of the low-speed variable display is constant, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is determined according to the variable display time. Then, the stop information is specified based on the game result and the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2. As a result, compared with the case where the stop result of the middle symbol sequence Z2 is not specified, the possible stop results are limited, so the amount of information stored in advance as the possible stop results can be reduced. ..

Here, as means for adjusting the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, means for changing the time from the fluctuation start timing to the reach occurrence timing, or changing the display mode of the middle symbol row Z2 at the reach occurrence timing can be considered. .. However, in the former case, the variation display pattern from the variation start to the reach generation timing is greatly different between the case where the reach is generated and the other cases. Then, the player is made aware of the occurrence of the reach at a timing before the reach occurrence timing, which reduces the motivation for the game. On the other hand, in the latter case, the display mode of the middle symbol row Z2 at the reach occurrence timing will change according to the stop result, so the final stop result may be inferred from the display state of the middle symbol row Z2 at the reach occurrence timing. There is. On the other hand, if the display mode of the middle symbol row Z2 at the reach occurrence timing is set to be random, fluctuations such as changing the fluctuation display speed in order to stop and display the stop result determined at the fluctuation end timing. A pattern adjustment process is required. Then, the amount of information of the variation pattern increases.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the display mode of the middle symbol row Z2 at the reach occurrence timing is the same regardless of the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2. As a result, the final stop result is not predicted from the display mode of the middle symbol row Z2 at the reach occurrence timing. Further, since the time from the start of fluctuation to the reach generation timing is constant, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 corresponding to the fluctuation display time is uniquely determined. Then, the stop result of the identified middle symbol row Z2 and the stop result corresponding to the game result of this time are set. As a result, it is not necessary to execute the process of adjusting the position of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 or the variable display speed so that the stop result relating to the game time is obtained at the timing when the variable display time elapses. For example, in the case of a configuration in which the stop results of a plurality of middle symbol rows Z2 can be set from the same variable display time, it is necessary to set the variable display patterns corresponding to the stop results. Then, a plurality of variation patterns (20 in this embodiment) are set, which causes a problem that the amount of information increases. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the variation pattern is common regardless of the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2. Therefore, the amount of information stored in advance is reduced.

In addition, in such a configuration, since the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is changed by changing the variable display time, the variety of stop results is secured.

Next, the super reach display will be described. The super reach display is the same as the normal reach display until the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2, which is the final stop symbol row, is switched from the high speed fluctuation display to the low speed fluctuation display from the fluctuation start timing to the reach occurrence timing. The variable display mode of is different. Specifically, the super-reach display is a low-speed fluctuation display to a high-speed fluctuation display (first speed) at a predetermined timing during the low-speed fluctuation display (for example, a timing at which the "7" symbol passes through the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z2). The internal command generation and output processing is executed so that the display or the third speed display which is faster than the second speed display) is switched to, and then the high speed fluctuation display is switched to the low speed fluctuation display again. Then, during the high-speed fluctuation display after the occurrence of the reach, a symbol replacement process for replacing the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is executed so that the symbol corresponding to the stop result is finally stopped in the middle symbol row Z2. Thereby, without giving the player a feeling of strangeness within the variable display time set by the main controller 81, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 determined in the stop result setting process for super reach is stopped to the middle symbol row Z2. Can be displayed. That is, the super reach display is a reach display in which the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 and the variable display time do not uniquely correspond to each other.

Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 29), after performing the variation display pattern setting process in step S1904, the flag erasing process is performed in step S1905. The flag erasing process will be described later. In step S1906, after starting high-speed fluctuations of all the symbol arrays Z1 to Z3, this fluctuation start processing is ended. The various information stored in the register of the MPU 252 in step S1901 is erased when the fluctuation starting process ends.

The changing display process of step S1805 in the changing display control process (FIG. 28) is a process related to the pending notice, and will be described later.

<Process for ending fluctuation>
Next, the fluctuation ending process of step S1806 in the fluctuation display control process (FIG. 28) will be described. The fluctuation ending process is a process that is executed when a fluctuation ending command is received. Specifically, the fluctuation display end timing of the middle symbol row Z2, which is the final stop symbol row, that is, the fluctuation display time elapse timing This is the process performed.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 36, in step S2201, the final stop display command output process is executed. Thereby, the final stop display command is output to the VDP 255, and the final stop display of the symbols of the stop result in the current game time is displayed.

The subsequent processing in steps S2202 and S2203 is processing related to the reservation notice. This will be described later.

<Regarding variable display control processing when issuing a notice of holding>
Next, the variable display control process when executing the suspension notice will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 29, if the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored in step S1902 of the fluctuation starting process, the individual lottery process is executed in step S1907. In the individual lottery process, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute the hold notice in the variable display. Specifically, in the individual lottery process, the counter value (numerical value information) for individual lottery is read from the lottery counter area 323 of the work RAM 254. In the individual lottery process, the individual lottery table (notice lottery information group) stored in the individual lottery table storage area (notice lottery information group storage means) 317 of the program ROM 253 is referred to and read out. It is determined whether or not the individual lottery counter value corresponds to the individual winning. Although the probability of individual winning is arbitrary, in the pachinko machine 10, the individual lottery table is set so that the probability of winning is 4/5.

In a succeeding step S1908, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery process in the step S1907 is a win. If not winning, the process advances to step S1903. If the lottery result is a win, the process proceeds to step S1909, and the stop result setting process corresponding to the suspension notice is executed.

In other words, the notice of holding is executed when the lottery for generating a notice of holding is won and when the individual lottery is won. As a result, there is a case where the notice of holding is not executed even in the game times that is won in the holding lottery. In other words, a jackpot result is expected even when the pending notice is not continuously executed in the game times before the game times related to the pending information that triggered the pending notice. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the reservation notice.

The stop result setting process corresponding to the suspension notice will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the stop result setting process corresponding to the reservation notice, first, in step S2301, the notice symbol type information is read from the notice symbol type information storage area 326. In a succeeding step S2302, it is determined from the information stored in the register of the MPU 252 whether or not the jackpot winning or the out-reach occurs in the current game time. That is, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game time.

When it is determined that the reach does not occur, the stop line determination process is executed in step S2303. That is, the numerical information stored in the line information updating area 328 at that time is acquired.

In a succeeding step S2304, a symbol combination determining process is executed. In the process, the combination information table for complete removal in the combination information table storage area 314 is referred to, and the information about the combination of complete removal symbols corresponding to the type information of the design for notice grasped in step S2301 is specified. The complete removal combination information table is a table in which information on a combination of complete removal symbols is set according to the stop line information and the type information of the notice symbol. In this case, on the condition that the combination of the jackpot symbols and the combination of the reach symbols are not stopped on all the activated lines, the symbols corresponding to the type information of the notice symbols are stopped in the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The stop line information identified in step S2303 is also referred to so that the display is stopped at the display position, and the information of the combination of the complete deviation symbols is identified. For example, in the case where the type information of the design for notice is "7" and the stop line is the left line L1, the combination of complete deviation symbols is "7" from the top, "6" and "7". The sub-symbols between, the information of the combination of the completely out-of-symbols is specified so as to be the sub-symbols between "6" and "7". In this case, the symbol "7" is stopped and displayed on the right line L3 in the middle symbol column Z2, and the symbol "7" is stopped and displayed on the right line L3 in the lower symbol column Z3.

Here, even under the condition that the notice of suspension is not established, the suspension result in the case of complete disconnection or disconnection reach is the suspension result as described above, that is, the same suspension as in the case of suspension announcement accidentally. It may result. In other words, even in a game game that is not a game game that is associated with execution of the hold notice, the hold notice may be stopped. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game.

In a succeeding step S2305, a storage process of the address information of the stop information is executed. That is, the address information corresponding to the information of the stop line specified in step S2303 and the information of the combination of the complete outliers specified in step S2304 is read out from the stop information table in the stop information table storage area 313 and read out. The address information of the stop information is stored in the stop information address storage area 329.

On the other hand, if the reach display occurs, the process proceeds to step S2306, and it is determined whether the type of the reach display this time is the normal reach display. When it is not the normal reach display, it means that the current reach display is the super reach display. In this case, the process advances to step S2307 to execute the super-reach stop result setting process. In the process, the symbol corresponding to the notice symbol is used as a symbol forming a combination of the super reach symbols, and the symbol corresponding to the notice symbol is finally stopped in the middle symbol row Z2 during the high-speed fluctuation display after the reach occurs. As described above, the symbol replacement process for replacing the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is executed. As a result, it is possible to execute the hold notice with the symbol corresponding to the notice symbol without giving the player a feeling of strangeness within the variable display time set by the main control device 81, and to play the game related to the hold notice. , It becomes possible to associate the mode of the stop result with the game times related to the hold information set as the trigger of execution of the hold notice.

Even at the reach occurrence timing, the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2 does not switch from the high speed variation display to the low speed variation display, the high speed variation display is maintained, and the high speed variation display changes from the low speed variation at a predetermined timing after the reach occurs. Similarly, the reach display that switches to the display can also execute a hold notice with a symbol corresponding to the notice symbol by changing the symbol during high-speed fluctuation.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S2306, the operation proceeds to step S2308, and a stop result grasping process for the middle symbol row Z2 is executed. In the process, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is grasped from the variable display time. Specifically, it refers to the middle symbol row stop result table. Thereby, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is grasped from the variable display time.

Next, in a step S2309, it is determined whether or not the game result is a big hit. When the game result is a big hit, it means that the game time is the game time that triggered the execution of the hold notice. In this case, stop line determination processing is executed in step S2310. In the process, the stop line is determined in correspondence with the position of the same symbol as the notice symbol that is specified to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2.

In the subsequent jackpot symbol determination process of step S2311, the same symbol as the notice symbol is selected as a jackpot symbol, and in step S2312, a combination of the jackpot symbol corresponding to the stop result, the stop line, and the jackpot symbol in the middle symbol row Z2. Identify information in.

After that, in step S2313, the storage process of the address information of the stop information is executed. That is, the address information corresponding to the stop line information and the jackpot symbol combination information is read from the stop information table in the stop information table storage area 313, and the read stop information address information is stored in the stop information address storage area 329. To store.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2309 that the game result is not a big hit, it means that the game result is a miss result. In this case, the process proceeds to step S2314, and the disengagement normal reach stop result setting process corresponding to the suspension notice is executed.

<Regarding the stop result setting process for the out-of-order normal reach corresponding to the hold notice>
The process for setting the stop result for the out-of-order normal reach corresponding to the reservation notice will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the stop result setting process for the disengagement normal reach corresponding to the hold notice, if the stop result that corresponds to the hold notice and is the disengagement reach result can be set without changing the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, While setting the stop result, without changing the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, it corresponds to the hold notice by the notice symbol, and if the stop result that is the out-reach result cannot be set, the middle symbol row Z2 Without changing the stop result, set the stop result which is the detach reach result that does not correspond to the hold notice.

First, in step S2401, a reach line determination process is executed. The process is the same as step S2101 of the disengagement normal reach stop result setting process that does not correspond to the pending notice in FIG.

Then, in step S2402, a reach symbol determination process is executed. The process for determining the reach symbol is different from the case where the pending notice is not supported. Specifically, the program ROM 253 is provided with a hold advance notice reach symbol determination table storage area 318, and refers to the hold advance notice reach symbol determination table stored in the hold advance notice reach symbol determination table storage area 318. .. The reach symbol table for notice for reservation is set with the reach symbol in a one-to-one correspondence with the type of the symbol for notice. In detail, the hold announcement reach design determination table is set so that the same design as the announcement design is selected as the reach design. By referring to the table, the reach symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the pending notice symbol. Thereby, when the same symbol as the notice symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2, the stop result corresponding to the hold notice by the notice symbol is displayed. In other words, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is uniquely determined by the variable display time, and the suspension notice by the notice symbol is executed without executing the process of controlling the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2. In other words, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the holding notice by the notice symbol can be executed. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced.

For example, if the type information of the symbol for notice is "7", and the stop result of the middle symbol column Z2 is recognized from the variable display time when the symbol "7" is stopped and displayed on the left line L1, the figure As shown in FIG. 39(a), the symbol "7" is stopped and displayed on the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the reach symbol combination having the reach symbol "7" is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2. To be done. Then, in the middle line L2 of the upper symbol row Z1, the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the middle line L2 of the lower symbol row Z3, the symbol "7" is stopped and displayed. That is, the stop result corresponds to the notice of holding by the notice symbol. In other words, the reservation notice with the notice symbol will be executed. As a result, a hold notice with the same symbol as the symbol that is stopped and displayed in the game time that triggered the hold notice is executed, so the game times that triggered the hold notice and the game times of the hold notice are Closely related. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a series of variable display patterns of symbols in these consecutive game times as a series.

On the other hand, if the same symbol as the notice symbol is not stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2, the stop result does not correspond to the hold notice. For example, when the type information of the symbol for notice is "7" and the stop result of the middle symbol column Z2 is recognized from the variable display time when the symbol "5" is stopped and displayed on the left line L1, the figure As shown in 39(b), the symbol "5" is stopped and displayed on the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the reach symbol combination that the reach symbol is "7" is stopped on the middle line L2, for example. The stop result may be set to be displayed. In this case, since the symbol "7" is not stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, there is no symbol that is commonly stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the stop result does not correspond to the suspension notice. Then, the stop information corresponding to the stop result is directly specified.

In the case of FIG. 39(b), that is, when the same symbol as the notice symbol is not stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2, in order to execute the hold notice by the notice symbol, the stop result of the middle symbol column Z2 is executed. Need to change. However, when executing the reservation notice by the notice symbol, even if it is necessary to change the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is not changed. Then, without changing the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, the stop result that does not correspond to the suspension notice is selected. In other words, when it is necessary to change the variable display time in order to execute the hold notice using the notice symbol, the hold notice is not executed. As a result, the change of the variable display time due to the reservation notice is suppressed.

If the suspension notice is given, assuming that the variable display time longer than usual is selected or the variation display time shorter than usual is selected, each game time is consumed in the situation where the suspension notice is given. It takes longer or shorter. Then, depending on how to adjust the angle and direction of the nails provided in the game area, the game holes in which the winning holes are relatively easy to win and the winning holes in the working holes 33 and 34 are relatively easy to occur. There is a possibility that a difference occurs in the digestion rate of the game times per unit time between the game hall in which is relatively difficult to occur. In other words, in the former game hall, there is a high possibility that a plurality of pieces of hold information are already stored at the timing when the hold information that triggers execution of the hold notice is stored, while on the other hand, in the latter game hall, there is a possibility that such hold information is stored. Low. In this case, if the variable display time longer than usual is selected, the digestion rate of the game times per unit time in the former game hall is lower than that of the latter game hall, and variable display time shorter than usual is selected. If this is done, the digestion rate of the game times per unit time in the former game hall will be higher than in the latter game hall. On the other hand, when the variable display time is affected, the execution of the hold notice is restricted so that the hold notice is given without affecting the digestion rate of the game times per unit time. The effect can be obtained.

From the above, it is possible to preferably execute the suspension notice without changing the variable display time. Thereby, the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

In addition, since the individual lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to execute the hold notice for each game, the hold notice may not be given even when the hold notice condition is satisfied. In other words, the suspension notice may not be given continuously. As a result, even if the execution of the reservation notice is restricted, the player does not feel uncomfortable. If there is no individual lottery process, and if there is a plurality of previous game times related to the hold information that triggered the execution of the hold notice, the hold notice is executed for all the game times. In this case, if the execution of the reservation notice is restricted, the player will feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, since individual lottery processing is provided, when there are multiple game times before the hold information that triggered the execution of the hold notice, it is common that the hold notice is not continuously executed. It is in. As a result, even if the execution of the reservation notice is restricted, the player does not have a special impression.

Then, in steps S2403 to S2405, it is determined whether or not the combination of the big hit symbols is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines from the stop result, the reach symbol, and the reach line of the middle symbol row Z2 of this time. At the same time, when the stop display is performed, the reach line changing process is executed. These processes are the same as the processes in steps S2103 to S2105 of the out-of-normal-reach stop result setting process that does not correspond to the suspension notice.

Here, by adopting a configuration in which the reach line is changed, the reservation notice by the notice symbol is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40(a), it is specified that the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, the reach symbol, and the combination of symbols "7" are stopped and displayed on the left line L1 from the reach line. In the case of, the reach line is changed to the middle line L2. As a result, as shown in FIG. 40(b), the combination of the big hit symbols is prevented from being stopped and displayed on the activated line, and the reach symbol (that is, the notice symbol) is held by the symbol "7". It is the result of the notice stoppage. If it is configured to change the reach symbol, it is not possible to stop and display the stop result corresponding to the hold notice by the notice symbol. Therefore, it is possible to execute the suspension notice with the notice symbol while avoiding the stop display of the combination of the jackpot symbols on the activated line.

Next, in the processes of steps S2406 to S2408, a process of restricting a symbol other than the notice symbol to be the stop result corresponding to the hold notice is executed. First, in step S2506, the reservation advance notice stop line change table stored in the stop line change table storage area 315 is referenced. The stop announcement stop line change table is a table relating to a reach display in which a combination of reach symbols is stopped and displayed on the two activated lines L4 and L5, that is, a so-called double reach display.

In detail, the suspension notice stop line change table is, as shown in FIG. 41, a combination of jackpot symbols on any of the activated lines based on the stop line, the type of reach symbol, and the stop result of the middle symbol column Z2. Is not stopped and displayed, and a pattern other than the design for notice is stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines in advance.

For example, the stop line is the upward-sloping line L5, the type information of the notice symbol is "1", and the symbol "1" is specified to be stopped on the left line L1 of the middle symbol column Z2 from the variable display time. 42A, as shown in FIG. 42(a-1), the symbol "1" is stopped on the right line L3 of the upper symbol row Z1, the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the left line L1 of the lower symbol row Z3. While being displayed, the symbol "2" is stopped and displayed on the left line L1 of the upper symbol row Z1, the right line L3 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the right line L3 of the lower symbol row Z3. Then, the symbol "2" which is a symbol other than the notice symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In other words, the stop result is the same as in the case of the reservation notice with the symbol "2" which is a symbol other than the notice symbol. On the other hand, in such a case, the stop line is changed to the middle line L2. Then, as shown in FIG. 42(a-2), the combination of the jackpot symbols is not stopped and displayed on any activated line, and the symbol "1" is stopped and displayed on each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Become. As a result, the stop result corresponding to the hold notice by the same symbol as the notice symbol is suppressed, while the same stop result as when the other symbols are the hold notice is suppressed. In other words, execution of the reservation notice by other symbols is restricted. Therefore, the game time of the reservation notice and the game time of the big hit are closely related.

Further, for example, if the stop line is an upward rising line L5, the type information of the notice symbol is "1", and if the symbol "2" is stopped on the left line L1 of the middle symbol column Z2 from the variable display time, If specified, as shown in FIG. 42 (b-1), the symbol "2" is on the left line L1 of the upper symbol row Z1, the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2, and the right line L3 of the lower symbol row Z3. It is stopped. Then, the symbol "2" which is a symbol other than the notice symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. That is, the stop result is the same as the case of the notice of holding with the symbol "2". On the other hand, in such a case, the stop line is changed to the left line L1. Then, as shown in FIG. 42(b-2), there is no symbol which is stopped and displayed in common in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. That is, the suspension result is a suspension result that does not correspond to the suspension notice. In other words, execution of the reservation notice is restricted.

In the reach display of the left line L1, the middle line L2, and the right line L3, the symbols commonly displayed in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are only the reach symbols as shown in FIG. 39 and the like. Is. Therefore, regardless of the stopping result of the middle symbol row Z2, the symbols that can be commonly displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are only reach symbols of the same symbol as the symbol for notice, and therefore the notice of suspension by other symbols Is never executed. That is, in the reach display, by making the reach symbol the same symbol as the notice symbol, with the exception of a part of the double reach indicator, execution of the reservation notice by other symbols is restricted.

Further, although the jackpot stop line change table and the pending notice stop line change table are respectively provided, the present invention is not limited to this and may be stored as one table. In such a case, since the changing process is completed by performing the table reference process once, it is possible to reduce the processing load.

Further, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and in the reach display for executing the hold notice, the execution of the double reach display may be uniquely restricted. That is, in the stop line determination process, the right-downward line L4 and the right-upward line L5 may be removed in advance. However, this embodiment is superior from the viewpoint of the reach display diversity. That is, when a symbol different from the reach symbols on both the right-down line L4 and the right-up line L5 is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, it is not necessary to change the reach line. It is not necessary to limit such a stop result.

In step S2409, the process of determining the symbol combination is executed, and in step S2410, the process of storing the address information of the stop information is executed. These processes are the same as the processes of steps S2106 and S2107 of FIG.

Returning to the description of the stop result setting process (FIG. 37) corresponding to the suspension notice, after executing the process of step S2305, step S2313, or step S2314, the process proceeds to step S2315. In step S2315, the advance notice execution flag (previous notice execution information) is stored in the advance notice execution flag storage area (previous notice execution information storage unit) in the various flag storage areas 334 of the work RAM 254. The advance notice execution flag is information for specifying, in the MPU 252, that the symbol display device 41 is executing a hold advance notice. Then, this stop result setting process is ended.

Returning to the description of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 29), the fluctuation display pattern setting process is executed in step S1904. The process is as described above. After that, the process proceeds to the flag erasing process of step S1905.

Here, the flag deletion process of step S1905 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the flag erasing process, first in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the jackpot holding flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If the jackpot holding flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2505 without executing the processes of steps S2502 to S2504. When the jackpot holding flag is stored, the information in the erasing counter area 322 is updated in step S2502 so that the value stored in the erasing counter area 322 is decremented by one.

Then, in step S2503, it is determined whether the value of the erasing counter area 322 is "0". If it is "0", the jackpot holding flag is erased in step S2504, and then the process proceeds to step S2505. If it is not "0", the process of step S2504 is not executed and step S2505 is executed. Proceed to.

As described above, the jackpot holding flag is a flag that is stored when holding information corresponding to jackpot winning is included in the holding information held and stored in the main control device 81, and is deleted. In the for-counter area 322, when the holding information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored, information for specifying the order in which the holding information is the starting target of the game time is stored. Furthermore, in the hold command handling process (FIG. 25), the process of step S1502 is executed at a timing before the process of step S1503 is executed, so that the hold information stored in the main control device 81 is held. If a plurality of holding information corresponding to the jackpot winning is included therein, the information of the order of the holding information corresponding to the jackpot winning, which is the starting order later, is stored in the erasing counter area 322. Becomes Therefore, when the information in the erasing counter area 322 is “0” as the initial value, the pending information stored in the main control device 81 is pending information corresponding to the jackpot winning. It means that there is not, in this case the jackpot pending flag is cleared.

In the flag erasing process, in step S2505, it is determined whether the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If the advance notice condition establishment flag is not stored, this flag erasing process is ended as it is. If the notice condition fulfillment flag is stored, the information in the hold notice counter area 327 is updated so that the value stored in the hold notice counter area 327 is decremented by 1 in step S2506. To do.

After that, in step S2507, it is determined whether the value of the pending notice counter area 327 is "0". If it is "0", the notice condition fulfillment flag is erased in step S2508, and then this flag erasing process is ended. If it is not "0", the process of step S2508 is executed. This flag erasing process is ended without any action.

The notice condition fulfillment flag is a flag that is stored when the condition for executing the hold notice is satisfied, as described above, and the condition for executing the hold notice is established in the hold notice counter area 327. In this case, information is stored to identify the order in which the hold information that is a factor for satisfying the condition is the start target of the game time. Therefore, when the information in the hold advance notice counter area 327 is "0" as the initial value, the hold information that has been a factor of fulfilling the condition for executing the hold advance notice has already become the start target of the game time. This means that the advance notice condition fulfillment flag is erased.

<Processing during fluctuation>
Next, the during-fluctuation process of step S1805 in the variable display control process (FIG. 28) will be described. The changing process is a game prize that is not the game time for which the hold announcement is being executed and is not the game time related to the hold information that has caused the execution of the hold announcement. Occurs, and when the execution condition of the hold notice is established for the hold information acquired based on the winning, it is a process for executing the hold notice in the current game time.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 44, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not the current game time is a big hit occurrence or a reach occurrence game time. In the case of a game time when a big hit occurs or a reach occurs, the process for mid-variation ends as it is.
If it is not the game time of jackpot occurrence or reach occurrence, in step S2602, the advance notice flag is stored in the work RAM 254, but the advance notice execution flag is not stored in the work RAM 254. Or not. Here, in the pachinko machine 10, as described above, the advance execution flag is stored by executing the variation start process (FIG. 29) in the situation where the advance condition fulfillment flag is stored. Therefore, the situation in which the advance notice execution flag is not stored even though the advance notice condition satisfaction flag is stored means that after the variation start process is executed, that is, the variation display of the symbols in one game is started. It means that a new prize is subsequently generated in the operating ports 33 and 34, and the condition for executing the hold notice for the hold information acquired based on the win is satisfied.

When the advance notice flag is stored and the advance notice execution flag is not stored, the process for the fluctuation is finished as it is, the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored, and the advance notice execution flag is stored. If not, the type information of the notice symbol is read from the notice symbol type information storage area 326 in step S2603. In a succeeding step S2604, it is determined whether or not all the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 are changing at high speed.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, when the symbol display is performed on the symbol display device 41, as shown in (a) to (c) of FIG. 46, first, the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and High-speed variable display (or first speed display) is performed so that the identification of each symbol displayed in the display screen G in all the symbol columns of the lower symbol column Z3 becomes impossible or difficult in appearance. After that, as the period T1 elapses from the start of fluctuation, first, regarding the upper symbol row Z1, it becomes easy to visually identify each symbol displayed in the display screen G in the upper symbol row Z1. The high-speed fluctuation display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display (or the second speed display slower than the first speed display), and when the period T2 has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the fluctuation display in the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped. Further, when the period of T2 has elapsed from the start of fluctuation in this way, it is easy to visually identify each symbol displayed in the display screen G in the lower symbol row Z3 with respect to the lower symbol row Z3. The high-speed fluctuation display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display so that the fluctuation display in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped when the period T3 has elapsed from the start of fluctuation. In addition, when the period T3 has elapsed from the start of variation in this way, in the middle symbol row Z2, it is easy to visually identify each symbol displayed in the display screen G in the middle symbol row Z2. Therefore, the high-speed fluctuation display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display. Then, when the period T4 has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the fluctuation display in the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped.

In the above configuration, except for the case where a predetermined reach display is performed, the period of T1, T2, T3, and T4 will be described in more detail in accordance with each variable display pattern stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 316. Is determined in a one-to-one correspondence with each variable display pattern. Then, the reach effect or the like is performed after the period T3 has elapsed and until the period T4 has elapsed.

The timing at which the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and the timing at which the variable display speed of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 are switched are not essential at the same time, and even if the timings of the two are deviated. Good. Similarly, the timing at which the variable display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and the timing at which the variable display speed of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 are switched are not essential at the same time, and both timings are deviated. May be. Further, the above T1, T2, and T3 correspond one-to-one with the number of hold information stored at the start of the game time, more specifically, according to the number of hold information stored at the start of the game time. The configuration may be determined according to the above. Further, when the number of pieces of reservation information stored at the start of the game game is the maximum reservation number, either T1, T2 or T3 may be set to "0".

In the MPU 252, the elapsed time counter area 332 as the elapsed time measuring means (or the elapsed period measuring means) provided in the work RAM 254 is used to measure the time from the start of the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41. Specifically, when the variable display is started, the addition processing of the elapsed time counter area 332 is executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec). Further, in the elapsed time table of the elapsed time table storage area 319 provided in the program ROM 253, information of each counter value corresponding to the above T1, T2, and T3 can be set at the start of the game game. Are stored in a one-to-one correspondence with. Then, in step S2205, by determining whether or not the value stored in the current elapsed time counter area 332 is less than the counter value corresponding to T1 in the elapsed time table storage area 319, all symbols are determined. It is determined whether the columns Z1 to Z3 are changing at high speed.

When it is determined in step S2604 that all the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 are changing at high speed, the first stage correction table as the first stage correction information group is referred to in step S2605. The first-stage correction table is stored in a correction table storage area 320 provided in the program ROM 253 as a correction information group storage unit. As shown in FIG. 45(a), the first-stage correction table is an arbitrary information of the initial variable display pattern information and the type information of the notice symbol except when a jackpot result and a reach display occur. Information of the variable display pattern for the first correction is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the combination of, and address information is set in association with the information of the variable display pattern for the first correction. There is. In this case, all the information of the first display variable display pattern is set as the information of the variable display pattern after the period T1 has elapsed from the start of the change. However, the information of each variable display pattern for first correction is set so as not to change the variable display time in the initially set variable display pattern.

In subsequent step S2606, address information for first correction (first correction information) corresponding to the combination of the type information of the design for notice specified in step S2603 and the information stored in the storage area 331 of the pattern information address. ) Is specified from the first-stage correction table, and the specified address information is stored in the correction information address storage area 333 provided in the work RAM 254.

Since the first correction address information is stored in the correction information address storage area 333, the MPU 252 determines that the period T1 has elapsed from the start of fluctuation based on the information in the elapsed time counter area 332. , The internal command is generated and output to the VDP 255 so that the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the information of the first display variable display pattern for correction is performed. Thereby, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, all the symbols corresponding to the type information of the notice symbols are provided on the condition that the combination of the jackpot symbol and the combination of the reach symbol are not stopped on all the activated lines. It is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

The information on the variable display pattern for the first correction stored in the first stage correction table includes not only the contents of the variable display of the symbol but also the information of the background image displayed together with the variable display of the symbol and The information on the image of the reach effect when the reach effect is performed is also included. Therefore, by outputting the internal command corresponding to the set first variation marking pattern for correction to the VDP 255, the background image is displayed together with the variable display of the symbols, and various effects such as reach effect are performed. If the effect is displayed, the effect image is displayed. This is the same for the information on the variable display pattern for the second correction and the information on the variable display pattern for the third correction, which will be described later.

After that, in step S2607, the notice execution flag is stored in the work RAM 254, and then the process during change is ended.

When it is determined in step S2604 that all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are not changing at high speed, it is determined in step S2608 whether the lower symbol row Z3 is changing at high speed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value currently stored in the elapsed time counter area 332 is less than the counter value corresponding to T2 in the elapsed time table storage area 319.

When it is determined that the lower symbol row Z3 is changing at high speed, in step S2609, based on the information stored in the storage area 329 of the stop information address, the type information of the stopped symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 is set. To figure out. In this case, as the type information of the stopped symbol, there are a case where the main symbol is one and a case where the main symbol is two, but in the case of one, it is specified as the symbol to be judged, and in the case of two. Both of them are specified as symbols to be judged.

In a succeeding step S2610, it is determined whether or not the correction condition is satisfied with respect to the symbol of the determination target specified in step S2609. The correction condition is set so that if the type information of the design for notice is a specific design, that is, an odd-numbered design, it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied regardless of which design is the determination target. In addition, if the type information of the notice design is a non-specific design, that is, an even-numbered design, it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied only when the design-target design is a non-specific design. Is set to.

Because the correction conditions are set as described above, a jackpot result or a reach display occurs due to a non-specific symbol in the game times related to the hold information that has caused the condition for executing the hold notice to be fulfilled. Nevertheless, it is prevented that the holding notice is executed by the specific symbol in the game time related to the holding notice before the game time. When the suspension notice is executed by a specific symbol, it is considered that the player expects the occurrence of a probability variation jackpot result that the combination of the same specific symbols will eventually stop on the activated line. Finally, if a reach symbol combination or a jackpot symbol combination is displayed due to a non-specific symbol, it is feared that the expectation will be impaired and the motivation to continue the game will be diminished, but this pachinko machine The configuration of 10 can prevent this. On the other hand, if a combination of reach symbols or a combination of jackpot symbols is finally displayed by the specific symbol, even if the notice of suspension is executed by the non-specific symbol in the game times related to the notice of suspension before that. For the player, it can be considered that the player is finally promoted from the non-specific symbol to the specific symbol, and it is considered that the motivation for continuing the game as described above is not reduced.

If the type information of the notice symbol is a specific symbol, that is, an odd-numbered symbol, it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied only when the symbol to be determined is the specific symbol. In addition, if the type information of the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, an even numbered symbol, it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied only when the symbol to be determined is a non-specific symbol. It may be set to. In this case, when the jackpot result is generated by the non-specific symbol or the reach display occurs in the game times related to the hold information that is the cause of the establishment of the condition for executing the hold notice, the hold notice is issued by the non-design symbol. If a jackpot result occurs or a reach display occurs due to a specific symbol in the game times related to the hold information that has caused the condition to execute the hold announcement, the hold announcement is given according to the specific symbol. It will be.

If it is determined in step S2610 that the correction condition is not satisfied, the present variation processing is ended as it is, and if it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2611.

In step S2611, the second stage correction table as the second stage correction information group stored in the correction table storage area 320 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 45(b), the table for the second stage correction includes the information of the initial variable display pattern and the type information of the symbol to be judged, except when the jackpot result and the reach display occur. The information of the variable display pattern for the second correction is set in a one-to-one correspondence with any combination, and the address information is set in association with the information of the variable display pattern for the second correction. ing. In this case, all the information of the variable display pattern for the second correction is set as the information of the variable display pattern after the period T2 has elapsed from the start of the variation. However, the information of each variable display pattern for the second correction is set so that the variable display time in the initially set variable display pattern is not changed.

In the following step S2612, for the second correction corresponding to the combination of the type information of the symbol to be judged that the correction condition is satisfied in step S2610 and the information stored in the storage area 331 of the pattern information address. Address information (second correction information) is specified from the second-stage correction table, and the specified address information is stored in the correction information address storage area 333.

In addition, when the correction conditions are satisfied for any of the symbols when the two symbols are the determination targets, the symbols on the side corresponding to the specific symbol are the determination targets for which the correction conditions are satisfied. It is configured to have a pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured such that the symbol corresponding to the non-specific symbol is the determination target symbol for which the correction condition is satisfied. Further, the design with the smaller number or the design with the larger number may be configured to be the determination target design for which the correction condition is satisfied.

Since the second correction address information is stored in the correction information address storage area 333, after the MPU 252 determines based on the information in the elapsed time counter area 332 that the period T2 has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, The internal command is generated and output to the VDP 255 so that the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the information of the variable display pattern for the second correction set this time is performed. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, it is determined that the above correction conditions are satisfied, provided that the combination of the jackpot symbols and the combination of the reach symbols are not stopped on all the activated lines. The target symbol is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

After that, in step S2613, the notice execution flag is stored in the work RAM 254, and then the during-change processing is ended.

When it is determined in step S2608 that the lower symbol row Z3 is not changing at high speed, it is determined in step S2614 whether the middle symbol row Z2 is changing at high speed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value currently stored in the elapsed time counter area 332 is less than the counter value corresponding to T3 in the elapsed time table storage area 319.

When it is determined that the middle symbol sequence Z2 is not changing at high speed, the process for main fluctuation is ended as it is. When it is determined that the middle symbol row Z2 is changing at high speed, in step S2615, based on the information stored in the storage area 329 of the stop information address, the type information of the stop symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 and , The type information of the lower symbol row Z3 is grasped. In this case, there is a case where the main symbol is one and a case where the main symbol is two as the type information of the stop symbol in the upper symbol row Z1, but in the case of one, it is determined as the symbol to be determined in the upper symbol row Z1. If the number is two, both of them are specified as the symbols to be judged in the upper symbol row Z1. Further, there is a case where the main symbol is one and a case where it is two as the type information of the stop symbol in the lower symbol sequence Z3, but in the case of one, it is specified as the symbol to be determined in the lower symbol sequence Z3. However, in the case of two, both of them are specified as the symbols to be judged in the lower symbol string Z3.

In a succeeding step S2616, it is determined whether or not a correction condition is satisfied for the designating target symbol specified in step S2615. As for the correction condition, it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied when there is no common symbol of the same type in the symbols to be determined in the upper symbol sequence Z1 and the symbols to be determined in the lower symbol sequence Z3. It is set not to be performed. In addition, even if there is a common design of the same type, if the type information of the design for notice is a specific design, that is, a design of an odd number, the common design of the same design is either Even if it is set so that it is determined that the correction conditions are satisfied, and if the type information of the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, an even-numbered symbol, the same common type It is set so that it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied only when the symbol is a non-specific symbol.

By determining that the correction condition is satisfied when the common symbols of the same type are present, it becomes possible to give the notice of holding in the already described mode. Further, as described above, by determining whether or not the correction condition is satisfied in relation to the type information of the design for notice, it is possible to achieve the same effect as the effect described in step S2610. Note that the correction condition relating to the relationship with the type information of the notice symbol may be the different pattern described in step S2610.

If it is determined in step S2616 that the correction condition is not satisfied, the present variation processing is ended as it is, and if it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2617.

In step S2617, the third stage correction table as the third stage correction information group stored in the correction table storage area 320 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 45(c), the table for the third stage correction shows the information of the initial variable display pattern and the type information of the symbol to be judged, except when a jackpot result and a reach display occur. The information of the variable display pattern for the third correction is set in a one-to-one correspondence with an arbitrary combination, and the address information is set in association with the information of the variable display pattern for the third correction. ing. In this case, all the information of the variable display pattern for the third correction is set as the information of the variable display pattern after the period T3 has elapsed from the start of the variation. However, the information of the variable display pattern for each third correction is set so as not to change the variable display time in the initially set variable display pattern.

In a succeeding step S2618, a third correcting operation corresponding to a combination of the type information of the symbol to be judged that the correction condition is satisfied in the step S2616 and the information stored in the storage area 331 of the pattern information address. Address information (third correction information) is specified from the third-stage correction table, and the specified address information is stored in the correction information address storage area 333.

By storing the address information for the third correction in the correction information address storage area 333, after the MPU 252 determines based on the information in the elapsed time counter area 332 that the period T3 has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, The internal command is generated and output to the VDP 255 so that the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the information of the variable display pattern for the third correction set this time is performed. As a result, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, it is determined that the above correction conditions are satisfied, provided that the combination of the jackpot symbols and the combination of the reach symbols are not stopped on all the activated lines. The target symbol is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

After that, in step S2619, the notice execution flag is stored in the work RAM 254, and then the during-change processing is ended.

It should be noted that it is not indispensable that the variable display pattern for holding notice is not modified in both the big-winning game times and the reach-producing game times, for example, during the big-winning game. Although the variable display pattern for the notice of holding is not corrected in the game time, the variable display pattern for the notice of hold may be modified in the game time when the reach occurs. In addition, by executing the processing of step S2610 and step S2616, the type of the stop symbol and the type of the notice symbol of the symbol sequence whose high-speed variable display has already ended are compared, and the notice symbol usually becomes the jackpot result. If the stop symbol is a specific symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result in the corresponding non-specific symbol, it is configured not to correct the variable display pattern, but it is not limited to this, and the notice symbol is The variable display pattern may be modified even if the stop symbol is a non-specific symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot result and the stop symbol is the specific symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result.

<State when variable display pattern is modified and pending notice is executed>
Here, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 46, a state in which the variable display pattern is corrected and the suspension notice is executed will be described.

FIG. 46(A) shows a case where the execution condition of the reservation notice is satisfied when all the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 are changing at high speed. In this case, the execution condition of the reservation notice is satisfied from the timing t1 which is the timing of the fluctuation start to the timing t2 when the period of T1 elapses. In such a situation, the variable display of the symbol is performed based on the initial variable display pattern from the timing of t1 to the timing of t2, and after the timing of t2, the variable display of the symbol is performed based on the variable display pattern for correction.

In FIG. 46(B), when the high speed fluctuation is not performed in the upper symbol row Z1, but the high speed fluctuation is performed in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, the execution condition of the pending notice is satisfied. Indicates. In this case, the execution condition of the reservation notice is satisfied from the timing of t2 when the period of T1 has passed to the timing of t3 when the period of T2 has passed. In such a situation, the variable display of the symbol is performed based on the initial variable display pattern from the timing of t1 to the timing of t3, and the variable display of the symbol is performed based on the variable display pattern for correction after the timing of t3.

In FIG. 46(C), when the fast change is not performed in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, but the high speed variation is performed in the middle symbol row Z2, when the execution condition of the reservation notice is satisfied. Indicates. In this case, the execution condition of the reservation notice is satisfied from the timing of t3 when the period of T2 has passed to the timing of t4 when the period of T3 has passed. In such a situation, the variable display of the symbol is performed based on the initial variable display pattern from the timing of t1 to the timing of t4, and the variable display of the symbol is performed based on the variable display pattern for correction after the timing of t4.

46(A) to (C) exemplify the case where the initial variation display patterns are the same, but in any of FIGS. 46(A) to (C), variation start (timing of t1 ) To the end of fluctuation (timing of t5), T4 is the same.

<Process for ending fluctuation>
Next, the fluctuation ending process of step S1806 in the fluctuation display control process (FIG. 28) will be described with reference to FIG.

As described above, in step S2201, the final stop display command output process is executed. Thereby, the final stop display command is output to the VDP 255, and the final stop display of the symbols of the stop result in the current game time is displayed.

In a succeeding step S2202, it is determined whether or not the advance notice execution flag is stored in the work RAM 254. If the advance notice execution flag is not stored, the process for ending this fluctuation is ended as it is, and if the advance notice execution flag is stored, after deleting the advance notice executing flag in step S2203, the process for ending this change is performed. The process ends.

<Specific mode of pending notice>
Next, a specific mode of the reservation notice including the case where the reach display occurs will be described. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific form of the reservation notice. FIG. 47 shows a case where a jackpot result is generated in the game times related to the hold information that is a factor of the satisfaction of the condition for executing the hold notice, and the game times related to the hold notice up to the last game time are shown. The case of twice is shown. In addition, as for the big hit symbol, the cases of (a) and (c) are the symbol “7” of the specific symbol, and the case of (b) is the symbol “6” of the non-specific symbol.

FIG. 47(a) shows a case in which a variable display pattern for the reservation notice is set in all the game times related to the reservation notice. In this case, the result of stopping the symbols in the first game shown in FIG. 47(a-1) is that the combination of the jackpot symbols and the combination of the reach symbols are not stopped on all the activated lines, but this is for the notice of the pending notice of this time. The symbol "7" which is the symbol is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

Further, in FIG. 47(a-2), the normal reach display occurs. As a result of stopping the symbols in the game times, a combination of reach symbols consisting of the symbol "7" which is the notice symbol of the present notice of suspension is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 and the left line of the middle symbol row Z2. The symbol "7" is stopped and displayed on L1. The stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is determined from the variable display time. As a result, in the normal reach display, the hold notice corresponding to the notice symbol is executed.

Then, in the final game time shown in FIG. 47(a-3), the normal reach display is executed. Specifically, except for the middle symbol row Z2, the symbol "7" is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 of each of the symbol rows Z1 and Z3, and at the same time, the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2 is once a high-speed fluctuation display. Changes to low speed fluctuation display. After that, the low-speed fluctuation display is maintained until the fluctuation display time elapses, the fluctuation display ends at the elapse timing of the fluctuation display time, and the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 corresponding to the fluctuation display time is stopped and displayed. In this case, the symbol "7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. This is because the type of the symbol for notice is determined to be "7" based on the fact that "7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 from the variable display time. As a result, the combination of the big hit symbols of the symbol "7" is stopped and displayed on the activated line of 1. That is, in the pattern shown in FIG. 47(a), the notice symbol is unified to the symbol "7" in all the game times relating to the hold notice.

FIG. 47(b) shows a case where the reach display is generated in all the game times related to the reservation notice. More specifically, FIGS. 47(b-1) and 47(b-2) show normal reach display, and FIG. 47(b-3) shows super reach display.

In this case, the result of stopping the symbols in the first game time shown in FIG. 47(b-1) is that the reach symbol combination consisting of the symbol "6", which is the notice symbol of the present notice of holding, is on the left line L1. Along with the stop, the symbol "6" is stopped on the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z2. As a result, in the normal reach display, the notice of holding by the notice symbol is executed.

On the other hand, the stop result of the symbols in the game times shown in FIG. 47(b-2) is stopped on the right line L3 as a reach symbol composed of the symbol "6" which is the notice symbol of the notice of this time hold. The symbol "7" is stopped on the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z2. The stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is determined from the variable display time. In this case, the symbol "6" is not stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. In other words, when the symbol corresponding to the notice symbol is not stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, the stop result does not correspond to the hold notice. That is, execution of the reservation notice is restricted.

Then, in the final game game shown in FIG. 47(b-3), the super reach display is executed. Specifically, except for the middle symbol row Z2, the symbol "6" is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 of each of the symbol rows Z1 and Z3, and at the same time, the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2 is once a high-speed fluctuation display. Changes to low speed fluctuation display. After that, while switching to the high speed fluctuation display again, the symbol replacement processing is executed so that the symbol "6" is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 during the high speed fluctuation display. Thereby, in the super reach display, the combination of the big hit symbols by the symbol "6" is stopped and displayed on the 1 effective line without changing the variable display time. That is, the jackpot result may be stopped and displayed in the super reach display, which is the reach display in which the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 does not depend on the variable display time.

In the pattern shown in FIG. 47(b), in the situation where the normal reach display occurs in the game times related to the hold notice, the middle symbol row Z2 has triggered the execution of the notice symbol, more specifically, the hold notice. When the same symbol as the symbol that is stopped and displayed in the game time is stopped and displayed, the stop result corresponds to the hold notice by the notice symbol. On the other hand, when the notice symbol is not stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, the stop result does not correspond to the hold notice. In other words, when displaying the stop result corresponding to the hold notice, if there is no need to change the stop result (variation display time) of the middle symbol row Z2, the hold notice is executed while changing the change display time. If it is necessary, do not execute the hold notice.

FIG. 47(c) shows a case where a variable display pattern for holding notice is set from the middle of the game time in the first game time of each game time related to holding notice. In this case, the stop result of the symbols in the first game time shown in FIG. 47(c-1) is that the combination of the jackpot symbol and the reach symbol is not stopped on all the activated lines, but the combination is changed in the initial variable display pattern. The symbol "6" corresponding to the stop symbol in the symbol column Z1 or the stop symbol in the lower symbol column Z3 is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

In addition, the stop result of the symbol in the next game time shown in FIG. 47(c-2) is that the combination of the jackpot symbol and the reach symbol is not stopped on all the activated lines, but the symbol for the notice of this pending notice is The symbol "7" is displayed as a stop at the stop display position in the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

After that, in the final game time shown in FIG. 47(c-3), the super reach display is executed, and the combination of the big hit symbols by the symbol of "7" is stopped and displayed on the activated line of 1. That is, in the pattern shown in FIG. 47(c), the player can expect that the stop result has been promoted from the non-specific symbol to the specific symbol in the next game number from the first game number relating to the suspension notice.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

The reservation notice according to the reservation information that is stored in the reservation area RE of the reservation ball storage area 232 and is not the target of the hit determination is executed in the game time before the game time related to the reservation information. Sometimes. As a result, for the player, a game that causes the game balls to win the operation openings 33 and 34 and a result of determining whether or not the holding information acquired based on the winning is confirmed in the game times related to the holding information. Not only that, when multiple pieces of hold information are stored in the hold area RE, the result of the hold information that is the target of the success/failure judgment is the result of the reservation notice The game of predicting according to is added, and the game is diversified. Thereby, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

The hold notice is given according to the display mode on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. As a result, if the player is paying attention to the display screen G in order to grasp the result of judgment of each game, he/she can naturally confirm the hold notice, and despite the fact that the hold notice is given, Is prevented from being overlooked. In addition, the effect of preventing the notice of suspension from being overlooked is enhanced by performing the notice of suspension by the variable display pattern of the symbols of each game time on the display screen G. In particular, by giving the hold notice according to the mode of the stop result in the variable display of the symbols of each game time, the timing when the hold notice is given becomes clear to the player, and the possibility of missing the hold notice is further reduced. It

In the configuration in which the suspension notice is given according to the mode of the suspension result as described above, when displaying the suspension result corresponding to the suspension notice, if it is necessary to change the variable display time, the suspension notice is executed. Limited As a result, the fluctuation of the fluctuation display time due to the execution of the suspension notice is suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the time required to consume each game time from varying depending on the content of the hold information set to trigger execution of the hold notice.

For example, when a suspension notice is given, if a variable display time longer than usual is selected or a variation display time shorter than usual is selected, each game time will be exhausted in the situation where the suspension notice is given. It takes longer or shorter. Then, depending on how to adjust the angle and direction of the nails provided in the game area, the game holes in which the winning holes are relatively easy to win and the winning holes in the working holes 33 and 34 are relatively easy to occur. There is a possibility that a difference occurs in the digestion rate of the game times per unit time between the game hall in which is relatively difficult to occur. In other words, in the former game hall, there is a high possibility that a plurality of pieces of hold information are already stored at the timing when the hold information that triggers execution of the hold notice is stored, while on the other hand, in the latter game hall, there is a possibility that such hold information is stored. Low. In this case, if the variable display time longer than usual is selected, the digestion rate of the game times per unit time in the former game hall is lower than that of the latter game hall, and variable display time shorter than usual is selected. If this is done, the digestion rate of the game times per unit time in the former game hall will be higher than in the latter game hall. On the other hand, when the variable display time is affected, the execution of the hold notice is restricted so that the hold notice is given without affecting the digestion rate of the game times per unit time. The effect can be obtained.

When making a reservation notice, each symbol constituting the combination of the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, provided that the combination of the jackpot symbols is not stopped and displayed on the one activated line. did. This makes it possible to make the mode of the stop result for the reservation notice similar to the mode of the stop result in the game times that is the jackpot result, and when the stop result for the hold notice is displayed, it corresponds to the hold notice. This makes it easier for the player to understand.

When the variable display of the symbols is performed on the symbol display device 41, the variable display is stopped after switching from the high-speed variable display to the low-speed variable display in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In the middle symbol row Z2 of the reach display, the time from the fluctuation start timing to the switching timing of the fluctuation display is constant, and the mode at the switching timing is a predetermined mode. As a result, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 changes according to the change display time. In this case, if the suspension notice corresponding to the content of the suspension information that triggered the execution of the suspension notice cannot be executed without changing the stop result of the middle symbol sequence Z2 that is the final stop symbol sequence, Restricted execution of pending notice. As a result, it is possible to suppress the change in the variable display time that accompanies the execution of the suspension notice.

Individual lottery processing is executed to determine whether or not to execute the hold notice for each game time, and when the lottery process is won, the hold notice is executed for the game time. In other words, the hold notice may not be executed even if the hold notice condition is satisfied in the game times before the hold information that triggered the execution of the hold notice. As a result, even if the execution of the reservation notice is restricted in the reach display, the player does not feel uncomfortable.

The type of the symbol for the hold notice is made to correspond to the type of the symbol that constitutes the combination of the jackpot symbols in the game times related to the hold information set as the trigger of the execution of the hold notice or the type of the symbol that constitutes the combination of the reach symbol. It was As a result, it becomes possible to associate the mode of the stop result with the game times for which the hold notice is given and the game times related to the hold information set as a trigger for executing the hold notice, and the variable display of the symbols in these consecutive game times. It is possible to provide the pattern as a series to the player.

In the reach display of the game times related to the hold notice, the reach symbol is set as the notice symbol. As a result, when the same symbol as the symbol for holding notice is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2, the notice for holding by the symbol for holding notice is executed, while the symbol for holding notice in the middle symbol column Z2. If the same symbol is not stopped and displayed, execution of the reservation notice is restricted. Therefore, if it is possible to execute the hold notice with the design for the hold notice without changing the variable display time, the hold notice is executed while executing the hold notice with the design for the hold notice. When it is necessary to change the variable display time, execution of the pending notice is restricted. Therefore, since the hold notice is given within the range in which the variable display time is not changed, the hold notice is given without changing the variable display time. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

Further, for example, if the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is grasped and the hold notice corresponding to the notice symbol can be executed based on the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, the stop result corresponding to the hold notice is set. On the other hand, while executing the process, if the notice of suspension corresponding to the notice symbol cannot be executed, if the process of setting the stop result that does not correspond to the notice of suspension is set, the notice is given based on the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2. It is necessary to determine whether or not the hold notice corresponding to the design can be executed, and there is a concern that the processing load will increase. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since it is not necessary to make the determination, the processing load can be reduced.

Furthermore, based on the stop line, the reach symbol, and the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, a table in which a pattern in which the combination of the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed is previously displayed on the activated line is provided, and by referring to the table, this time, It is determined whether or not the pattern of No. 2 corresponds to the pattern, and if it corresponds to the pattern, the stop line is set to be changed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the combination of the jackpot symbols from being stopped and displayed on the activated line, and to execute the hold notice by the notice symbol.

In a situation where the hold information that has already been set as the trigger for execution of the hold notice is stored, the hold information stored thereafter is not set as the trigger for executing the hold notice. As a result, the hold information that triggers execution of the hold notice does not exist in duplicate, and the hold information that triggers the execution of the hold notice becomes clear. If the pending information that triggers the pending notice is duplicated, it may be necessary to consider the other pending information when executing the pending notice for one pending information, which may complicate the process. By preventing the above duplication, it is possible to prevent such a situation.

In the situation where the holding information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the holding area RE, the holding information stored thereafter is not set as a trigger for executing the holding notice. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a jackpot result is generated in the game times related to the hold information different from the hold information set as the trigger for executing the hold notice, in the situation where the hold notice is being executed. ..

Further, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 executes the pending notice occurrence lottery process (step S1601) and becomes the pending notice occurrence win, so that the pending information that is the target of the lottery process serves as a trigger for executing the pending notice. Is set. In this case, in the situation where the hold information that is usually the jackpot result and does not trigger the execution of the hold notice is stored, the hold information that corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result is newly stored and the hold information is It may be set to trigger execution of the hold notice. In this case, as a notice of holding triggered by the latter hold information in the game times before the game times related to the former hold information, the combination of symbols for hold notice is stopped and displayed by the symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result. It is assumed that In other words, it is assumed that the combination of symbols for pending notice corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result is stopped and displayed, but the combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the normal jackpot result is stopped and displayed in the subsequent game times. .. When such an event occurs, although the player expects the probability variation jackpot result to occur due to the hold notice, the actual jackpot result actually occurs, and the player's willingness to play is increased. May cause decline. On the other hand, as described above, in a situation where the holding information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the holding area RE, the holding information stored thereafter is not set as a trigger for executing the holding notice. As a result, it is possible to achieve the effects already described while preventing a decrease in game motivation.

<Second Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the jackpot pattern or the reach pattern in the game times related to the hold information set as the trigger for executing the hold notice is set as the hold notice pattern, and when the reach occurs, the hold notice is set. Although the suspension notice according to the symbol is executed or the suspension notice itself is not executed, in the present embodiment, the effect contents of the suspension notice are different from those in the first embodiment. The configuration of this embodiment different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

In the present embodiment, the structure of the reach symbol determination table for reservation notice is different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, in the reach symbol determination table storage area 318 for hold notice, a reach symbol determination table for specific symbol hold notice that determines the reach symbol so as to obtain a stop result corresponding to the hold notice by the specific symbol, and a non-specific A reach symbol determination table for non-specific symbol hold notice is stored that determines a reach symbol so that a stop result corresponding to a notice of holding by a symbol is obtained. Then, the process of FIG. 48 is executed instead of the process of FIG.

First, in step S2701, stop line determination processing is executed as in the first embodiment. Then, in step S2702, it is determined whether or not the notice symbol is the specific symbol. If the symbol for notice is a specific symbol, the process proceeds to step S2704 to refer to the reach symbol determination table for notice of specific symbol hold notice. On the other hand, if the symbol for notice is not a non-specific symbol, the process proceeds to step S2703 to refer to the reach symbol determination table for non-specific symbol reservation notice.

The reach symbol determination table for the non-specific symbol hold notice and the reach symbol determination table for the specific symbol hold notice will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49(a) is an explanatory diagram that schematically shows the reach symbol determination table for non-specific symbol reservation notice, and FIG. 49(b) schematically shows the reach symbol determination table for specific symbol hold notice. FIG.

In the reach symbol determination table for the non-specific symbol hold notice, the information of the symbols forming the reach symbol combination is set in one-to-one correspondence with the combination of the stop line and the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2. The stop line determined in the stop line determination process, and the information on the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 determined by the variable display time is referred to, and the information on the type of the reach symbol is specified.

Specifically, if the type information of the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, an even-numbered symbol, the specific symbol, that is, an odd-numbered symbol, so as not to result in a stop corresponding to the pending notice, the reach symbol Is set. For example, if the reach line is the left line L1 and it is specified that the symbol “1” is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z2, the reach symbol is determined to be “4”. That is, the information of the combination of reach symbols is specified so that the symbol "4" is stopped and displayed on the left line L1 of the upper symbol column Z1 and the left line L1 of the lower symbol column Z3. In this case, as shown in FIG. 50(a), the symbol "4" is stopped and displayed on the left line L1 of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, and "1" is displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. Only the design of is displayed. There is no symbol that is stopped and displayed in common to all symbol columns Z1 to Z3. That is, when the symbols stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 are only specific symbols, the reach symbol does not become a suspension result that is a suspension notice due to the combination of the reach symbol and the stop symbol in the middle symbol column Z2. Is set as follows. In other words, when the symbols stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 are only specific symbols, execution of the reservation notice is limited.

As described above, when only the specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, it is set not to execute the hold notice, and thus the hold that has become a factor for fulfilling the condition for executing the hold notice. Even if the jackpot result occurs or the reach display occurs due to the non-specific symbol in the game time related to the information, the hold notice is executed by the specific symbol in the game time related to the hold notice prior to the game time. Is prevented. When the suspension notice is executed by the specific symbol, it is considered that the player expects the occurrence of the probability variation jackpot result that the combination of the same specific symbol will eventually stop on the activated line. Finally, if a reach symbol combination or a jackpot symbol combination is displayed due to a non-specific symbol, it is feared that the expectation will be impaired and the motivation to continue the game will be diminished, but this pachinko machine The configuration of 10 can prevent this.

If the stop line is the left line L1 and it is specified that the symbol "1" is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z2, the symbol forming the combination of the reach symbols is determined to "4". However, the design is not limited to this, and the design of “2” may be used. The point is that the symbols other than the stopped symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 may be specified as the symbols constituting the reach symbol combination.

Further, the reach symbol determination table for non-specific symbols is set to identify the same symbol as the reach symbol as the reach symbol when the non-specific symbols are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2. For example, when the stop line is the left line L1 and it is specified that the symbol "1" is stopped and displayed on the left line L1 of the middle symbol row Z2, the reach symbol is specified as the symbol "2". In this case, the symbol "2" is stopped and displayed on the left line L1 of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, and the symbol "2" is stopped and displayed on the right line L3 of the middle symbol row Z2. .. As a result, the suspension result corresponds to the notice of suspension by the non-specific symbol. That is, the notice of suspension by the non-specific symbol is executed.

As for the specific symbol reach symbol determination table, as shown in FIG. 49(b), like the non-specific symbol reach symbol determination table, it is one-to-one with respect to the combination of the stop result of the stop line and the middle symbol sequence Z2. The information of the symbols forming the combination of the reach symbols is set correspondingly. The stop line determined by the stop line determination process, and the information of the reach symbol is specified with reference to the information of the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 determined by the variable display time. At that time, when only the non-specific symbols are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, the reach symbol is selected so that the stop result corresponding to the suspension notice does not result.

For example, when the stop line is the left line L1 and it is specified that the symbol "2" is stopped in the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z2, the reach symbol is specified as the symbol "1". As a result, there is no symbol that is stopped and displayed in common to all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. That is, the stop result does not correspond to the suspension notice. In other words, execution of the hold notice is restricted. In addition, when the stop line is the left line L1 and it is specified that the symbol "2" is stopped in the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z2, the symbol "1" is selected as the reach symbol. The number is not limited and may be “3”. In short, any design other than the design of "2" which is the stop result corresponding to the suspension notice by the non-specific design may be used. That is, when only non-specific symbols are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, a combination of reach symbols by symbols other than the non-specific symbols may be selected.

Furthermore, when the specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, the same symbol as the specific symbol is set to be identified as a symbol forming a combination of reach symbols. For example, when the stop line is the middle line L2, and it is specified that the symbol "2" is stopped and displayed on the left line L1 of the middle symbol string Z2, the symbol forming the combination of reach symbols is specified as "3". To be done. That is, the information about the combination of reach symbols is specified so that the symbol "3" is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 of the upper symbol row Z1 and the middle line L2 of the lower symbol row Z3. In such a case, the symbol "3" is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, and the symbol "3" is stopped and displayed on L3 of the middle symbol row Z2. .. As a result, the suspension notice with the specific symbol is executed.

Note that the specific combination information table is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, the same symbol as the stop symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 may be specified as the reach symbol. As a result, in the reach display, the suspension notice can be executed without changing the variable display time. In this case, regardless of the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, the suspension notice by the specific symbol or the non-specific symbol will be executed. That is, although the combination of the reach symbol of the specific symbol and the combination of the jackpot symbol are finally stopped and displayed, the suspension notice by the non-specific symbol is executed. Then, even when the notice of suspension by the non-specific symbol is given, it can be considered that the player has finally been promoted from the non-specific symbol to the specific symbol, and the motivation to continue the game is decreased. It is thought to be ephemeral. In short, if the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, that is, if the game result in the game time that triggered the execution of the hold notice is a normal jackpot result, it may be limited so as not to execute the hold notice with the particular symbol.

In addition, in such a configuration, when a notice of suspension is continuously given in a plurality of game times, when a combination of specific symbols is stopped and displayed in the previous game time, a non-specific symbol in a later game time. It is better not to stop the combination of. As a result, it is possible to favorably increase the player's expectation that the probability variation jackpot result will be generated when the suspension notice is continuously given in a plurality of game times.

The subsequent processing is the same as in the first embodiment. However, since the condition of the reservation notice is different from that of the first embodiment, it is preferable to change the reservation notice stop line change table accordingly.

<Specific mode of pending notice>
Next, a specific mode of the reservation notice accompanied by the reach display will be described. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific form of the reservation notice. FIG. 52 shows a case where a jackpot result is generated in the game times related to the hold information that is a factor of the satisfaction of the condition to execute the hold notice, and the game times related to the hold notice up to the last game time are shown. It is twice, and in each case, the reach display occurs. In addition, the combination of the jackpot symbols shows that the case (a) is the non-specific symbol "6" and the case (b) is the specific symbol "7".

The result of stopping the symbols in the first game time shown in FIG. 52(a-1) is that the combination of reach symbols is stopped and displayed on the left line L1, and the symbol "1" is displayed on the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z2. Is stopped. In this case, symbols of the same type are not stopped and displayed in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. That is, execution of the hold notice is restricted.

In addition, the stop result of the symbols in the first game shown in FIG. 52(a-2), the left line L1, the combination of reach symbols consisting of the symbol "2" is stopped and displayed, and the middle symbol row Z2. The symbol "2" is stopped and displayed on the right line L3. As a result, the non-specific symbol “2” is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

Thereafter, in the final game time shown in FIG. 52(a-3), the combination of the big hit symbols by the symbol "6" is stopped and displayed on the activated line of 1. That is, in the pattern shown in FIG. 52(a), in the game times related to the reservation notice, when the stop symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is only the specific symbol, the execution of the reservation notice is restricted and the middle symbol row Z2. In the case where the non-specific symbol is stopped, the notice of holding by the non-specific symbol is executed. In other words, the notice design is limited to non-specific designs.

FIG. 52(b) shows a case where the hold notice is executed in all the game times related to the hold notice and the reach display is generated in each game time. In this case, the result of stopping the symbols in the first game time shown in FIG. 52(b-1) is that the left line L1 shows that the combination of reach symbols consisting of the symbol "3" is stopped and displayed, and the middle symbol row is also displayed. The symbol "3" is stopped and displayed on the right line L3 of Z2. As a result, the symbol "3" of the specific symbol is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

As a result of stopping the symbols in the first game time shown in FIG. 52(b-2), a combination of reach symbols consisting of the symbol "5" is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, and the right side of the middle symbol row Z2. The symbol "5" is stopped and displayed on the line L3. As a result, the symbol "5" of the specific symbol is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

After that, in the final game time shown in FIG. 52(b-3), the combination of the big hit symbols by the symbol "7" is stopped and displayed on the 1 activated line. That is, in the pattern shown in FIG. 52(b), the notice symbols are unified into the specific symbols in all the game times related to the hold notice.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are exhibited.

The types of symbols for the hold notice are made to correspond to the types of jackpot results in the game times related to the hold information set as a trigger for executing the hold notice. Specifically, if the game result in the game times related to the hold information set as a trigger for execution of the hold notice is a probability variation jackpot result, the hold notice according to the specific symbol is set to be executed, while the hold notice is set. When the game result in the game times related to the hold information set as the trigger for execution is a normal jackpot result, it is set to execute a hold notice with a non-specific symbol. As a result, it becomes possible to associate the form of the stop result with the game times for which the hold notice is given and the game times concerning the hold information set as the trigger of the execution of the hold notice, and the variable display of the symbols in these consecutive game times. It is possible to provide the pattern as a series to the player.

In particular, in the reach display in which the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, if it is specified that only the specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2 that is the final stop symbol column, it is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2. The design that is different from the design is specified as the reach design. As a result, execution of the reservation notice by the specific symbol is restricted. When the symbol for notice is a non-specific symbol, the jackpot result is usually considered as the game result of the game times related to the hold information set as the trigger for executing the hold notice. In this case, despite the fact that the notice of suspension by the specific symbol was executed, when the combination of the jackpot symbol of the non-specific symbol is actually stopped and displayed, the player expects the probability change jackpot by the special notification. Nonetheless, in reality, it is usually a big hit, which may lead to a decline in the player's willingness to play. On the other hand, in the reach display in which the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, by restricting execution of the hold notice with the specific symbol, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned desire to play the game from decreasing.

In the first embodiment, in the game times related to the hold information set as the trigger of execution of the hold notice, the hold notice is executed with the same symbol as that when the jackpot or the reach occurs. When the pending notice by the symbol cannot be executed without changing the variable display time, execution of the pending notice itself is restricted. Specifically, in the reach display, the hold notice is given only when the notice symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, and in other cases, the hold notice is not executed. As a result, the game times related to the hold information set as the trigger for executing the hold announcement and the game times for executing the hold announcement are closely associated with each other, but the frequency of executing the hold announcement has decreased. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether the notice symbol is a specific symbol or a non-specific symbol, and when the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, the non-specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2. When it is specified, the reach symbol is specified so that the pending notice by the non-specific symbol is executed. As a result, when only a specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, that is, except when an odd number symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z2, non-specific without changing the variable display time. The notice of holding by the symbol will be executed. That is, the frequency of execution of the suspension notice is higher than that in the first embodiment. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the disengagement normal reach stop result setting process corresponding to the reservation notice is different from the other embodiments. The different points will be described below.

In the out-of-order normal reach stop result setting process corresponding to the reservation notice in the present embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 53, first, in step S2801, whether or not the notice symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. To judge. The stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is grasped by the stop result grasping processing of the middle symbol row Z2 in step S2308 in the stop result setting processing (see FIG. 37) corresponding to the suspension notice. When it is specified that the notice symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2, the process proceeds to step S2802, and the pending notice correspondence table is referred to.

The suspension notice correspondence table is stored in a dedicated storage area of the program ROM 253, and the stop line information and the symbol combination information are associated with the type information of the notice symbol and the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 in a one-to-one correspondence. Is uniquely set. Here, the stop line information and the symbol combination information set in the table are based on the type information of the notice symbol and the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 without changing the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2. The normal reach stop result is set to be disengaged, and the notice symbol is set to be stopped and displayed in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. By referring to the suspension notice correspondence table, the stop line information and the combination information of the symbols are uniquely specified from the type information of the notice symbol and the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2.

The stop line information and the symbol combination information are set so that the jackpot symbol combination is not stopped on any of the activated lines. Further, the stop line information and the combination information of the symbols are set so that the stop result corresponding to the suspension notice by the symbols other than the notice symbol is not obtained. That is, the symbols that are stopped and displayed in common in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are limited to only the notice symbols.

After that, in step S2803, a process of storing the address information of the stop information is executed, and this process ends. The storage process is the same as the storage process of the stop information address information in FIG.

On the other hand, when it is specified that the notice symbol is not stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2, negative determination is made in step S2801. In this case, as shown in FIG. 54, a disengagement normal reach stop result setting process that does not correspond to the hold notice is executed. The setting process corresponds to the process executed in step S1903 in the fluctuation start process (FIG. 29). That is, the processes of steps S2901 to S2907 correspond to the processes of steps S2101 to S2107 shown in FIG.

Specifically, in step S2901, the process of arbitrarily selecting the reach line is executed. Specifically, the numerical information stored in the line information updating area 328 at that time is acquired, and the reach line corresponding to the acquired numerical information is selected.

In a succeeding step S2902, processing for arbitrarily selecting a reach symbol is executed. Specifically, the numerical information stored in the reach symbol update area 330 at that time is acquired, and the reach symbol corresponding to the acquired numerical information is selected.

In the processing of subsequent steps S2903 to S2905, from the reach symbol and reach line determined by lottery, when a combination of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed, or with a stop result corresponding to a reservation notice with a symbol other than the notice symbol When it is specified, the process for changing the reach symbol or reach line is executed.

First, in step S2903, the change table is referred to instead of the jackpot change table. In the change table, in addition to the table for avoiding a combination of jackpot symbols, in order to avoid a stop result corresponding to a pending notice by a combination of jackpot symbols and a symbol other than the notice symbol Table is set.

Explaining a table for avoiding a combination of big hit symbols, the table is changed to correspond to the combination of the stop result, the reach symbol, and the reach line of the middle symbol row Z2, which is the combination of the big hit symbols. The line is set. The changed reach line is a reach line set so that the combination of the big hit symbols is not stopped and displayed based on the stop result and the reach symbol in the middle symbol row Z2.

Explaining the table for avoiding the stop result corresponding to the combination of the jackpot design and the notice for holding other than the design for notice, in addition to the combination that is the combination of the jackpot pattern, The change reach symbol is set corresponding to the combination of the stop result, the reach symbol, and the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2, in which the stop result corresponding to the suspension notice by the symbols other than the symbol is displayed. Based on the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 and the determined reach line, the changed reach symbol is displayed so that the combination of jackpot symbols is not stopped and displayed, and the stop result corresponding to the hold notice by the symbols other than the notice symbol is displayed. It is a reach pattern that is set not to be displayed.

Here, in step S2903, first, a process of determining whether or not the advance notice condition satisfaction flag is stored is executed. Then, when the advance notice condition establishment flag is not stored, the former table is referred to, while when the advance notice condition establishment flag is stored, the latter table is referred to.

If it is determined in step S2904 that there is no corresponding information, the process advances to step S2906. On the other hand, when it is determined that the corresponding information is present, it means that the combination of the jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed when the notice condition satisfaction flag is stored, and the notice condition satisfaction flag is stored. In that case, it means that the combination of jackpot symbols is stopped or displayed, or the stop result corresponding to the hold notice by a symbol other than the notice symbol is displayed. In this case, the process proceeds to step S2905 and the change process is executed. In the change processing, when the advance notice condition satisfaction flag is not stored, the reach line is changed to the change reach line by referring to the former table so that the combination of the jackpot symbols is not stopped and displayed. Further, in the situation where the notice condition satisfaction flag is stored, by referring to the latter table, the combination of the jackpot symbols is not stopped and displayed, and the stop result corresponding to the hold notice by the symbols other than the notice symbols is displayed. Reach design is changed so as not to be changed to reach design.

As a result, if the execution condition of the hold notice is not satisfied, the reach symbol or the reach line is not changed even if the stop result corresponds to the hold notice with a symbol other than the notice symbol. It is like this. That is, if the execution condition of the hold notice is not satisfied, the execution of the out-of-front/rear reach display is not restricted.

Then, in step S2906, a process for determining symbol combination information is executed. In the process, by referring to the combination information table, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, the reach line (change reach line if the reach line is changed), and the reach symbol (change reach if changed) The information of the reach symbol combination corresponding to the (symbol) combination is specified. As described above, the reach symbol combination indicates a combination of three symbols including the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2.

After that, in step S2907, the storage process of the address information of the stop information is executed. The process is the same as step S2107.

In the present embodiment described in detail above, it is determined whether or not the hold notice corresponding to the notice symbol can be executed without changing the stop result of the middle symbol sequence Z2, and if it is executable, the reach symbol is selected. While setting to the design corresponding to the notice design, it is configured to select an arbitrary reach design when it cannot be executed.

Here, in the first embodiment, the reach symbol corresponding to the announcement symbol is determined without the above determination. As a result, since it is not necessary to make the above determination, it is possible to reduce the processing load, but when the probability of winning is different between the probability variation jackpot and the regular jackpot, the frequency of the notice symbols to be selected is biased. May occur. In detail, for example, when the probability of winning a probability variation jackpot is relatively higher than the probability of winning a regular jackpot, a specific symbol is likely to be selected as the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed in the jackpot game times. Then, when the jackpot pattern is set as the notice symbol, the specific symbol is more likely to be selected as the notice symbol than the non-specific symbol. Thereby, regardless of whether or not the hold notice corresponding to the notice symbol can be executed without changing the stop result of the middle symbol sequence Z2, the reach symbol corresponding to the notice symbol is selected to perform the first implementation. In the form (or the second embodiment), the reach pattern is biased.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the reach pattern is changed only when the pending notice corresponding to the notice symbol can be executed, it is possible that the probability of winning is different between the probability variation jackpot and the normal jackpot. Even if there is, bias is less likely to occur in the reach pattern selected.

In the process of setting the stop result for the normal reach release corresponding to the notice of hold in the present embodiment, the combination of the stop line and the pattern is unique so as to obtain the result of the stop normal reach corresponding to the notice of hold by referring to the hold notice correspondence table. Is decided. As a result, as the process, only the suspension notice correspondence table is referred to and the stop information uniquely derived based on the table is set, so that the processing load can be reduced.

In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, since it is determined whether or not the notice symbol is stopped in the middle symbol row Z2 and the process is executed according to the determination result, there is a concern that the processing load will increase. On the other hand, by adopting the configuration of setting the stop result corresponding to the suspension notice in the process of referring to the table, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience caused by providing the determination process. However, from the viewpoint of the variety of stop results, the first embodiment is superior.

Further, the pending notice correspondence table is set so as not to result in a stop result corresponding to a pending notice by a symbol other than the notice symbol, and a combination of jackpot symbols is not stopped and displayed on any of the activated lines L1 to L5. Is set. As a result, it is possible to preferably execute the suspension notice without causing confusion to the player.

In the stop result setting process for the outlying normal reach that does not correspond to the hold notice, the reach notice and the reach line determined by the lottery and the combination of the symbols stop-displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 give the notice of the hold other than the notice symbol. When the stop result corresponding to is stopped and displayed, the reach pattern is changed so that the stop result corresponding to the suspension notice by the symbol other than the notice symbol is not stopped and displayed. As a result, it is possible to associate the game times that triggered the execution of the hold announcement and the game times related to the hold announcement.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the variation-use processing in the game times of the reach generation is different from that of the first embodiment. The different points will be described below.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 55, in the changing process in the present embodiment, the processes of steps S3001 to S3019 are the same as the processes of steps S2601 to S2619 of FIG. In the present embodiment, in the step S3001, in the case of a game hit of jackpot occurrence or reach occurrence, the process proceeds to step S3020 and the reach handling process is executed. In the reach handling process, a new prize is not given to the operating ports 33, 34 in the middle of a game time that is not the game time at which the hold announcement is being executed and is not the game time related to the hold information that has caused the execution of the hold announcement. This is a process for executing the hold notice while performing the reach display in the current game time when the hold notice execution condition for the hold information generated based on the winning is satisfied.

The process will be described in detail. First, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 56, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not the current game number is a big hit. If it is a game time when a big hit occurs, this reach processing is ended as it is.

If no big hit has occurred, the process proceeds to step S3102. Here, the processes of steps S3102 and S3103 are the same as the processes of steps S2602 and S2603 of the above-described change-in-progress process (FIG. 44), and thus description thereof is omitted.

In a succeeding step S3104, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is grasped. The process is the same as the process of step S2007 in the stop result setting process (see FIG. 30) that does not correspond to the suspension notice.

Then, in step S3105, it is determined whether or not all the symbol strings are changing at high speed. When it is determined that all the symbol rows are changing at high speed, the process proceeds to step S3106, and it is determined whether or not the notice symbol stops in the middle symbol row Z2.

When it is specified that the notice symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol row Z2, it means that the stop result corresponding to the hold notice by the notice symbol cannot be stopped and displayed without changing the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2. , And this processing is finished as it is.

On the other hand, when it is specified that the notice symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2, the process proceeds to step S3107, and the disengagement normal reach stop result setting process corresponding to the hold notice is executed. The process is similar to the process shown in FIG. As a result, the stop result of the disengagement normal reach corresponding to the suspension notice is set, and the address information of the stop information corresponding to the newly set stop result is stored. That is, the stop information set in the fluctuation start process is corrected to the stop information corresponding to the suspension notice. Here, the stop information corrected by the process is set as the correction stop information. Note that this process may be the process shown in FIG. 38 instead of the process shown in FIG.

In step S3108, the reach correspondence first stage correction table as the first stage correction information group corresponding to the reach display is referred to. The reach correspondence first stage correction table is stored in the correction table storage area 320 as the correction information group storage means provided in the program ROM 253. As shown in FIG. 57A, the reach-corresponding first-stage correction table has one pair for any combination of the information of the initial variable display pattern and the correction stop information when the out-reach display is generated. The information of the variable display pattern for reach-correcting first correction is set in correspondence with 1, and the address information is further set to correspond to the information of the variable display pattern for reach-correcting first correction. In this case, all the information of the variable display pattern for the reach corresponding first correction is the period T1 from the start of the change (from the high speed change display to the low speed change display after the change display is started in the upper symbol row Z1). Is set as the information of the variable display pattern after the elapse of the period (1). In the stop result setting process for the outlying normal reach corresponding to the notice of suspension, since the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is not changed, the information of the variable display pattern for each reach corresponding first correction is the originally set fluctuation. The variable display time in the display pattern is not changed.

In the following step S3109, the address information corresponding to the variable display pattern for the reach corresponding first correction specified in step S3108 is specified from the reach corresponding first stage correction table, and the specified address information is provided in the work RAM 254. The corrected correction information address is stored in the storage area 333.

By storing the address information for the first reach-corresponding correction in the correction information address storage area 333, the MPU 252 determines based on the information in the elapsed time counter area 332 that the period T1 has elapsed from the start of fluctuation. From then, the internal command is generated and output to the VDP 255 so that the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the information of the variable display pattern for the first reach-correction set this time is performed. Thereby, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the disengagement reach result corresponding to the notice symbol is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G.

In addition, in the information of the variable display pattern for the reach correspondence first correction stored in the reach correspondence first stage correction table, not only the contents of the variable display of the symbol but also the background displayed together with the variable display of the symbol Information on images and information on images for reach production are also included. Therefore, by outputting the internal command corresponding to the set variation display pattern for the first reach-corresponding correction to the VDP 255, the background image is displayed together with the variable display of the symbols, and further the reach effect image is displayed. To be done. This is the same for the information on the variable display pattern for the second correction, which will be described later.

After that, in step S3110, the notice execution flag is stored in the work RAM 254, and then the during-variation process is ended.

When it is determined in step S3105 that all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are not changing at high speed, it is determined in step S3111 whether the lower symbol row Z3 is changing at high speed. Specifically, the value currently stored in the elapsed time counter area 332 is the period T2 in the elapsed time table storage area 319 (from the start of fluctuation, the fluctuation display in the lower symbol row Z3 is the high speed fluctuation display to the low speed fluctuation display). It is determined whether or not the counter value is less than the counter value corresponding to the period (switched to.

When it is determined that the lower symbol row Z3 is not changing at high speed, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the lower symbol row Z3 is changing at high speed, in step S3112, the stop result of the upper symbol row Z1 is grasped based on the information stored in the stop information address storage area 329. To do. Specifically, of the lines L1 to L3 in the upper symbol row Z1, the symbol stopped on the right line L3 is specified.

Next, in the processing of steps S3113 to S3115, it is determined whether or not a hold notice corresponding to the notice symbol can be executed without changing the stop result of the upper symbol row Z1 and the middle symbol row Z2, and it can be executed. In this case, a process of correcting the stop result of the lower symbol row Z3 is executed so that the stop result corresponding to the suspension notice is obtained.

First, in step S3113, the lower symbol row stop result correction table stored in the correction table storage area 320 is referenced. The lower symbol row stop result correction table, as shown in FIG. 58, shows the stop result corresponding to the suspension notice by the notice symbol from the stop result of the upper symbol row Z1, the notice symbol, and the stop result of the middle symbol column Z2. It is a table in which possible patterns are extracted in advance. In step S3114, it is determined whether or not the combination of the stop result of the present symbol row Z1, the notice symbol, and the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is the combination set in the lower symbol row stop result correction table. .. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the notice symbol is stopped in both the middle symbol row Z2 and the upper symbol row Z1.

Here, in the situation where the high-speed fluctuation of the patterns in the upper symbol row Z1 has ended, the player can recognize the patterns that are being displayed in a variable manner. For this reason, if the mode of variable display of the upper symbol row Z1 is changed under the situation, the player may easily recognize an unnatural mode caused by the change, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness. Further, as described above, it is not preferable to change the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 in the normal reach display. Therefore, in the game times related to the normal reach display, in the situation where the high-speed fluctuation of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 has ended, when executing the hold notice by the notice symbol, the upper symbol row Z1 and the middle symbol The same symbol as the notice symbol needs to be stopped and displayed in the column Z2. Therefore, in the lower symbol row stop result correction table, a pattern in which the same symbol as the announcement symbol is stopped and displayed in both the upper symbol row Z1 and the middle symbol row Z2 is set.

If the determination result is affirmative, it means that it is possible to execute the hold notice corresponding to the notice symbol, so in step S3115, the stop result setting process of the lower symbol sequence Z3 is executed. In the process, the stop result of the lower symbol row Z3 is determined so that the stop result corresponding to the notice of holding by the notice symbol is obtained. Specifically, in the lower symbol row stop result correction table, the corrected stop result of the lower symbol row Z3 is set according to the combination of the stop result of the upper symbol row Z1, the notice symbol, and the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2. Has been done. As for the correction stop result of the lower symbol row Z3, the announcement symbol is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the reach symbol and the reach line are uniquely set so as to be the out-reach result.

For example, as shown in FIG. 59(a-1), from the top on the left line L1, the design of "2", the sub design between the design of "4" and the design of "1", the design of "2" When the initial stop result is set so that the symbols are stopped and displayed, there is no symbol that is commonly stopped and displayed in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. That is, the suspension result corresponding to the suspension notice is not obtained.

On the other hand, under the condition that the high-speed variable display of the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped, the execution condition of the reservation notice is satisfied, and when the type information of the notice symbol is “1”, the right line L3 is displayed. The stop result of the lower symbol row Z3 is corrected so that the symbol "1" is stopped and displayed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 59(a-2), the symbol "1" is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Therefore, the stop result is the stop result corresponding to the notice of suspension by the design for notice.

In this case, the correction stop result of the lower symbol row Z3 is set so that the symbol "1" is stopped and displayed on the right line L3, but a reach is generated, and "1" is set to the lower symbol row Z3. From the viewpoint of stopping and displaying, it is also possible to stop and display the symbol "1" on the left line L1. However, when the symbol "1" is stopped and displayed on the left line L1, the symbol "2" is stopped and displayed on each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and in the case of a suspension notice by a symbol other than the notice symbol. Since the same stop result is obtained, the player may be confused. On the other hand, when the symbol "1" is stopped and displayed on the right line L3, the symbol "2" is not stopped and displayed on the lower symbol row Z3, so that such an inconvenience is avoided. In other words, the stop result corresponding to the hold notice with the same symbol as the notice symbol is suppressed, while the same stop result as that of the case where the other symbols are the hold notice is suppressed. In other words, execution of the reservation notice by other symbols is restricted. Therefore, the game time of the reservation notice and the game time of the big hit are closely related.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 59(b-1), the initial stop so that the symbol "1", the symbol "3", and the symbol "1" are stopped and displayed from the top on the right line L3. Under the situation where the result is set, and the high-speed fluctuation of the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped, if the execution condition of the hold notice of which the type information of the notice symbol is "2" is satisfied, "2" is displayed on the right line L3. The stop result of the lower symbol row Z3 is corrected so that the symbol "" is stopped and displayed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 59(b-2), the symbol "2" is stopped and displayed in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and the notice of suspension by the symbol "2" which is the notice symbol is dealt with. The stop result is displayed. In other words, the reservation notice with the notice pattern is executed. In this case, the reach display is changed from the single reach display to the double reach display.

Here, from the viewpoint of generating the reach and stopping and displaying the symbol "2" in the lower symbol row Z3, it is also possible to stop and display the symbol "2" on the left line L1. However, when the symbol "2" is stopped and displayed on the left line L1, the combination of the jackpot symbols by the symbol "2" is stopped and displayed on the left line L1. Therefore, such a stop result of the lower symbol row Z3 is excluded from the lower symbol row stop result correction table.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59(c-1), in the double reach display by the symbol "1" and the symbol "2", the symbol "1" and the symbol "2" are stopped in the middle symbol column Z2. When it is displayed, the stop result corresponds to the notice of holding by the symbol "1" and the symbol "2". In such a case, under the situation where the high speed fluctuation of the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped, if the execution condition of the pending notice by the symbol of which the type information of the notice symbol is "1" is satisfied, "1" is displayed on the right line L3. The stop result of the lower symbol row Z3 is corrected so that the symbol of "No." As a result, the double-reach display is changed to the single-reach display, and the suspension result corresponds to the notice of holding only by the symbol "1". That is, the execution of the hold notice with the symbol "2" is restricted.

In the lower symbol row stop result correction table, the stop result in which the main symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 in the upper symbol row Z1 is not set. If the main symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, the main symbol stopped and displayed on the upper symbol row Z1 is only the symbol displayed on the middle line L2, and the reach line is limited to L2. It As a result, when the reach display is executed under the situation, the stop result of the lower symbol row Z3 is uniquely determined. Therefore, there is no room to correct the stop result of the lower symbol row Z3. On the other hand, when the main symbol is stopped and displayed on the right line L3 or the left line L1, there are two main symbols that are stopped and displayed on the upper symbol row Z1, and the reach lines that can be selected are all except the middle line L2. Is the line. As a result, it is possible to change the reach symbol or the reach line by changing the stop result of the lower symbol row Z3, and it is also possible to change the single reach display to the double reach display. Therefore, there is room to correct the stop result of the lower symbol row Z3.

Further, the situation where the symbol "1" is stopped and displayed on the right line L3 is the same as the situation where the symbol "2" is stopped and displayed on the left line L1, so for the stop symbol on the left line L1 , Don't need to consider. In short, it is only necessary to extract an expected pattern for either the right line L3 or the left line L1.

After the process of step S3115 is executed, in step S3116, the storage process of the address information of the correction stop information is executed, and the address information of the correction stop information is stored. In a succeeding step S3117, the reach-corresponding second-stage correction table as the reach-corresponding second-stage correction information group stored in the correction-table storage area 320 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 57(b), the reach correspondence second stage correction table is made to correspond one-to-one with any combination of the information of the initial variable display pattern and the correction stop information in the out-reach display. Information on the variable display pattern for the second reach-correcting correction is set, and further, address information is set in association with the information on the variable display pattern for second reach-correcting correction. In this case, all the information of the variable display pattern for the second reach-corresponding correction is set as the information of the variable display pattern after the period T2 has elapsed from the start of the variation.

In step S3118, the address information for second reach correction (second correction information) corresponding to the combination of the correction stop information and the information stored in the storage area 331 of the pattern information address is corrected in the second step for reach correspondence. It is specified from the use table, and the specified address information is stored in the correction information address storage area 333.

The reach-corresponding second correction address information is stored in the correction information address storage area 333, so that the MPU 252 determines based on the information in the elapsed time counter area 332 that the period T2 has elapsed from the start of fluctuation. Generates and outputs an internal command to the VDP 255 so that the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the information of the variable display pattern for the second reach-corresponding second correction set this time is performed. Thereby, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped, the combination of the jackpot symbols is not stopped on all the activated lines, and the stop result corresponding to the hold notice by the symbols other than the notice symbols is not stopped and displayed. Under the condition, the same symbol as the notice symbol is stopped and displayed at the stop display position in the display screen G in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

After that, in step S3119, the preliminary execution flag is stored in the work RAM 254, and then the during-change processing is ended.

Here, when the determination result of step S3114 is a negative determination, it means that it is not possible to display the stop result for hold notice by the notice symbol without changing the stop result of the upper symbol sequence Z1 and the middle symbol sequence Z2. .. Specifically, it means that it is specified that the notice symbol is not stopped and displayed on at least one of the upper symbol column Z1 and the middle symbol column Z2. In this case, this processing is finished as it is. That is, the initial suspension result that does not correspond to the suspension notice is displayed. In other words, when the suspension notice stop result due to the notice symbol cannot be displayed without changing the stop result of the upper symbol sequence Z1 and the middle symbol sequence Z2, execution of the suspension notice is restricted.

As described above, according to the present embodiment described in detail, the following excellent effects are achieved.

A new prize is generated in the operating ports 33, 34 in the middle of the game time in which the normal reach display is performed, and a reservation notice about the hold information acquired based on the prize can be given in the game time. As a result, the frequency of execution of the hold notice is increased, so that the player is more likely to confirm the hold notice.

In the game time of executing the normal reach display out, even if the situation of giving a notice in advance while the variable display of the symbol is being performed, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 already determined in the game time is changed. I was not allowed to. As a result, the time required to consume each game time may vary in a configuration in which a pending notice can be given at that game time even while the variable display of symbols is being performed. Can be suppressed.

In the game time for executing the out-of-order normal reach display, when the stop result for holding notice is displayed while the variable display of the symbols is being performed, it is stored in advance in the correction table storage area 320 of the program ROM 253. This is done by setting the information of the variable display pattern for correction. The information of the variable display pattern for correction is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the information of the variable display pattern that can be set at the start of the game time, and changes after a predetermined change display time in each game time. It is set as a display pattern. As a result, when changing the mode of the stop result that has already been set while the variable display of the symbols is being performed while preventing the change display time of the symbols that have already been determined from being changed, the display control device 212 In the MPU 252, the information of the variable display pattern for correction corresponding to the already set variable display pattern may be set. Therefore, the MPU 252 does not need to calculate the remaining time of the variable display and generate the information of the variable display pattern based on the calculation result, and the processing load can be reduced.

Further, when the variable display of the symbols is performed on the symbol display device 41, the variable display is stopped after switching from the high-speed variable display to the low-speed variable display in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In this case, when changing the mode of the stop result that has already been set while the variable display of the symbols is being performed, for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the variable display pattern after the switching timing to the low speed variable display is displayed. This is done by changing to a variable display pattern for correction. As a result, it is possible to change the mode of the stop result without giving the player a feeling of strangeness, as compared with the configuration in which the variable display pattern is changed in the state where the low speed variable display is being performed.

In particular, in the configuration in which the switching to the low speed variable display is sequentially performed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the information of the variable display pattern for correction is set in correspondence with the switching timing of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. .. As a result, in comparison with the configuration in which the information of the variable display pattern for correction is not set in correspondence with each switching timing, when the decision to give the notice of suspension is made in the middle of the game time, the game time is changed. There are more opportunities for the hold notice to be started.

In the game time for executing the normal reach display, the high-speed variable display of the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped, and the execution condition of the pending notice is satisfied under the situation where the lower symbol row Z3 is changing at high speed. It is determined whether or not the stop result for the hold notice corresponding to the notice symbol can be displayed without changing the stop result and the stop result of the upper symbol row Z1, and if it can be displayed, the stop result becomes the stop result. While correcting the stop result of the lower symbol row Z3, when it is impossible to display, the initial stop result is displayed. As a result, the stop result of the upper symbol row Z1 for which the high-speed fluctuation has ended is not changed regardless of whether or not the stop result for the hold notice can be displayed. Therefore, the player does not recognize an unnatural aspect that may be caused by changing the display aspect of the upper symbol row Z1 during the low speed variation display. Here, since the player can recognize the display mode of the pattern during the low-speed fluctuation display, an unnatural mode that can be caused by changing the display mode during the low-speed fluctuation display is during the high-speed fluctuation of the pattern. It is easier for the player to recognize as compared with the case of changing to. Therefore, it is easy for the player to feel uncomfortable by changing the display mode. Therefore, by not changing the display mode of the upper symbol row Z1 in which the high-speed fluctuation has ended, it is possible to correct the suspension result for the hold notice while suppressing the occurrence of discomfort that may occur due to the change.

Further, when the correction is executed, not only the reach pattern at the beginning but also the reach line can be changed. As a result, since the correctable range is expanded, it is possible to further increase the frequency of execution of the hold notice corresponding to the notice symbol, and it is possible to diversify the reach display. Further, when correcting the stop result of the lower symbol row Z3, the reach pattern and the reach line are uniquely determined. As a result, the processing load can be reduced.

It is determined whether or not the notice symbol is stopped in the middle symbol row Z2 (the middle symbol row Z2 and the upper symbol row Z1 when the high-speed variable display of the upper symbol row Z1 is finished), and the middle symbol row Z2( When the high-speed variable display of the upper symbol row Z1 has ended, if it is determined that the notice symbol does not stop in the middle symbol row Z2 or the upper symbol row Z1), the process of correcting the stop result is executed. I decided not to. As a result, the stop result is not corrected even when the notice of holding by the notice symbol cannot be executed, so that the storage capacity of the correction table can be reduced.

In addition, if the stop result for hold notice corresponding to the notice symbol can be displayed without changing the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 and the stop result of the upper symbol row Z1, it corresponds to the hold notice not corresponding to the notice symbol. The stop result of the lower symbol row Z3 is determined so that the stop result does not occur. As a result, it is possible to closely associate the game times associated with the hold announcement with the game times that triggered the execution of the hold announcement.

<Other Embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented as follows, for example. By the way, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of the configurations may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments.

(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbols that form the combination of reach symbols are determined based on the stop line, the type of the symbol for advance notice, and the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not done. For example, based on the type of the symbol for notice and the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, the information of the combination of the stop line and the reach symbol may be uniquely specified. In this case, information on the combination of the stop line and the reach symbol may be set in advance so that the combination of the jackpot symbols is not stopped and displayed on the activated line. As a result, it is not necessary to execute the stop line changing process, so that the processing load can be reduced. In this case, the stop result of the symbol is uniquely determined from the stop result of the notice symbol and the middle symbol row Z2, which is not preferable from the viewpoint of the variety of the stop result.

(2) In each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol "1" is set to pass through the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z2 at the reach occurrence timing, but the invention is not limited to this, and the left line L1 has the symbol "1". 7” may be set to pass through. The point is that the mode of the middle symbol row Z2, which is the final stop symbol row, may be determined at the reach occurrence timing.

(3) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the super reach display, the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2, which is the final stop symbol row, is switched from the high speed fluctuation display to the low speed fluctuation display at the reach occurrence timing, and then the low speed fluctuation display is being performed. At a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the "7" symbol passes through the middle line L2 of the middle symbol row Z2), the low speed fluctuation display is switched to the high speed fluctuation display, and then the high speed fluctuation display is switched to the low speed fluctuation display again. However, it is not limited to this. For example, even at the reach occurrence timing, the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2 does not switch from the high speed variation display to the low speed variation display, the high speed variation display is maintained, and the high speed variation display changes to the low speed variation at a predetermined timing after the reach occurrence. Similarly, the reach display that switches to the display can also execute a hold notice with a symbol corresponding to the notice symbol by changing the symbol during high-speed fluctuation.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the reach generation timing is constant with respect to the fluctuation start timing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach generation timing with respect to the fluctuation start timing is changed according to the fluctuation display mode (variation display time). May be varied. In such a case, the reach occurrence timing may be set so that the suspension notice with the symbol corresponding to the symbol for notice can be executed without changing the variable display time. In such a case, since the hold start notice and the reach start timing vary depending on the notice design, the above-mentioned respective embodiments are superior in that the hold notice can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, the "4" symbol is provided between the "9" symbol and the "1" symbol in the middle symbol row Z2, but the "4" symbol is not provided. May be. However, in such a case, when the symbol "9" which is the specific symbol on the left line L1 stops, the symbol "1" which is also the specific symbol on the left line L1 also stops, and the middle symbol row Z2 Non-specific symbols will not stop. As a result, the execution of the reservation notice by the non-specific symbol is restricted in the second embodiment, so that the frequency of the reservation notice decreases.

(6) In each of the above-described embodiments, a combination pattern of jackpots is specified in advance, and when the pattern corresponds to the pattern, the reach line is changed to stop the combination of jackpots on the activated line. Although the configuration is set so as not to do so, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is determined whether or not a combination of jackpot symbols is stopped on each of the activated lines L1 to L5, and when it is determined that a combination of jackpot symbols is stopped on the activated line, the stop line is set. The configuration may be changed. However, in this case, it is necessary to specify the symbols stopped and displayed on each activated line and execute the determination process on each of the lines L1 to L5. In this respect, the present embodiment is superior from the viewpoint of processing load, since only the process of referring to the table is required.

The stop line to be changed is arbitrary as long as the combination of the big hit symbols is not stopped and displayed on the activated line. Further, it is not limited to changing the stop line, and may be a configuration in which the symbols forming the reach symbol are changed. However, the configuration in which the reach line is changed is superior in that it is easy to execute the hold notice corresponding to the notice symbol.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, in the normal reach display, the stop result is determined according to the variable display time, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, in the variable display in the case of complete deviation, the variable display is displayed. The stop result may be determined according to the time. In short, the present invention can be applied to the variable display in which the stop result is set according to the variable display time.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, in the normal reach variable display, the variable display time is determined by the main controller 81, and the display mode corresponding to the determined variable display time is determined. The present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode may be directly determined, for example. As a result, the display mode is not affected by the variable display time. In such a case, when the display mode is determined, the display mode corresponding to the suspension notice may be set. However, the present embodiment is superior from the viewpoint of reducing the processing load and the amount of storage that is stored in advance.

(9) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the reach display, the variable display time is set within a range where it is not necessary to change the setting, so that the stop result corresponding to the hold notice by the notice symbol is set. The present invention is not limited to this, and in the reach display, execution of the reservation notice may be uniformly limited. However, the present embodiment is superior from the viewpoint of the execution frequency of the reservation notice.

(10) In each of the above embodiments, the number of reserves is not limited to four, and may be three or five or more.

(11) The method of measuring each time in each of the above-described embodiments is arbitrary, and the method of counting a predetermined value using the counter area may be an addition method or a subtraction method. Also, the method of monitoring the power failure in the main control device 81 and the like is arbitrary. Further, in the first embodiment, the number of rounds in each open/close execution mode is also arbitrary.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the configuration of giving the game ball to the prize winning of the game ball to the variable winning device 32 or the like is not limited to the configuration of directly paying out the game ball, but a function of storing a virtual game medium. In the configuration having, the virtual game medium may be added.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the symbol display device 41 may not be provided, and the result of lottery such as win/win lottery may be taught by the movable decorative member.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, as the support mode of the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower operation port 34, a non-supportable mode in which the electric accessory 34a is not opened is set instead of the low frequency support mode. Good. Further, even if the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the game ball may be won in the lower operation port 34.

(12) In each of the above embodiments, the lower working port 34 is provided with the electric accessory 34a, and the ease of winning the game ball in the lower working port 34 varies according to the gaming state. However, you may change this. For example, it may be configured such that the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is not provided and the ease of winning a game ball in the lower working port 34 does not change according to the gaming state.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the transition between the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode of the win/loss lottery mode is configured to be triggered by the occurrence of the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to shift to the low-probability mode when a predetermined number of game times predetermined in the high-probability mode are exhausted. In addition, for example, it may be configured to shift to the high-probability mode when a predetermined number of game times are exhausted in the low-probability mode.

In addition, when a lottery opportunity other than the jackpot lottery is established, the transition lottery of the win/loss lottery mode is performed, and when the promotion lottery is achieved in the transition lottery, the low-probability mode is changed to the high-probability mode. When it becomes, the high probability mode may be changed to the low probability mode.

(14) In each of the above-described embodiments, the distribution table is set such that the value of the jackpot type counter C2, which is a probability-varied jackpot result, overlaps between the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. The distribution table may be set so that the value of the resulting jackpot type counter C2 and the value of the ordinary jackpot type counter C2 that do not overlap in the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode do not overlap, and at least the 15R probability variable jackpot result The distribution table may be set such that the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that becomes a normal jackpot and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 that becomes a normal jackpot result do not overlap in the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode.

(15) In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, when the information to execute the hold notice is set (specifically, when the notice condition satisfaction flag is stored), the hold notice is issued at the start of each game time. However, it is not limited to this. The lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute, and the suspension notice is executed in the game times that are won in the lottery. For example, it is possible to have a configuration in which a reservation notice is always given at each game time until the game time is executed for the reservation information related to the setting for executing the reservation notice. In this case, the continuity of the reservation notice can be enhanced when the situation in which the information to execute the reservation notice is set is continued for a plurality of game times. However, the configuration of each of the above implementations is superior in that it does not give the player a feeling of strangeness when the pending notice is limited.

(16) In each of the above-described embodiments, the display control device 212 determines the type of the stop result symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main control device 81 determines the type of the stop result symbol. The configuration may be determined. In this case, the main control device 81 determines whether or not to issue the hold notice, and when the condition for executing the hold notice is satisfied, the main control device 81 determines the mode of the stop result corresponding to the hold notice. May be determined. Further, in the case of changing to a stop result for holding notice during the game, the main controller 81 may determine the variable display pattern for making the change.

(17) In each of the above-described embodiments, the hold information corresponding to the outreach can be a trigger for execution of the hold announcement. However, the hold information corresponding to the outreach does not serve as a trigger for the execution of the hold announcement, and thus a big hit. Only the hold information corresponding to the winning may be a trigger for executing the hold notice. In this case, if the player confirms the occurrence of the hold notice, he or she can know that the jackpot is won in the subsequent game times.

(18) The form of the stop result in issuing the hold notice is not limited to the form in each of the above-described embodiments as long as the player can recognize that it is the hold notice. For example, the mode of the stop result for notice of suspension may be a mode in which the combination of symbols is established in ascending or descending order of numbers on one effective line, and the combination of predetermined symbols is not the same symbol but one effective line. It may be a mode that is established above.

(19) In each of the above embodiments, when it is determined whether or not the hold information corresponds to the jackpot win in the confirmation process (FIG. 13) for announcing the hold in the main controller 81, the jackpot win is set. The configuration may be such that only a part of the numerical value information that is used as the transfer information is referred to. Further, in the low-probability mode, all transition information is referred to, but in the high-probability mode, only some transition information may be referred to. In this case, in the configuration in which the suspension notice is executed, the time required for one processing of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) in the main control device 81 is shortened, and the activation cycle of the timer interrupt processing is set to be shorter than that of the conventional one. Even if the timer interrupt process is not secured for a long time, it is possible to sufficiently prevent the timer interrupt process from being newly activated in the situation where the timer interrupt process is executed once. Further, in contrast to the normal processing (FIG. 16) of the processing times for executing various kinds of processing for starting the game times in the main control device 81, the confirmation processing (FIG. 13) for the reservation notice is executed. Even if the timer interrupt processing is interrupted, it is possible to prevent the time required for completing the normal processing of the processing time from being longer than necessary.

By the way, in the present configuration, when a hold command corresponding to the jackpot win is transmitted from the main control device 81 in a situation where the hold information that triggers execution of the hold notice is not stored, the hold notice is always executed. It may be configured such that the effect is set. Even in this case, when the pending information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the configuration that refers to only a part of the transition information set as the jackpot winning in the confirmation processing for the pending notice as described above. Is set to execute the reservation notice with a predetermined probability.

(20) In each of the above-described embodiments, the main control device 81 determines whether or not to give a notice of holding, and the holding command is transmitted from the main control device 81 only when it is decided to give a notice of holding. May be configured. In the present configuration, in a situation where it is already set to give a notice of holding, even if new holding information is stored, a process for preventing the setting for giving a new notice of holding about the holding information is performed. The main controller 81 may be used instead of the display controller 212. Specifically, the main controller 81 has a processing configuration relating to the advance notice condition establishment flag and the hold advance notice counter area 327 in each of the above-described embodiments.

(21) In each of the above-described embodiments, in the situation where the pending information corresponding to the jackpot winning is held and stored, even if the holding information is newly stored, the setting for giving the holding notice for the holding information is not performed. The processing may be performed by the main control device 81 instead of the display control device 212. Specifically, the main controller 81 may determine whether or not the jackpot winning is included in the hold information, and when the jackpot winning is included, the hold command may not be transmitted.

(22) In each of the above-described embodiments, when new hold information is stored in a situation in which it is already set to give a hold notice, a setting can be made to give a hold notice for the hold information. May be In this case, in the situation where a plurality of hold information that triggers execution of the hold notice is stored at the same time, if the jackpot result is obtained in the game times related to the hold information that is the start target, A configuration may be adopted in which the setting indicating that the notice of holding is to be executed, which is set for the holding information to be started later, is deleted. When the setting indicating that the suspension notice should be executed is erased, the timing when the game times that result in the jackpot result is finished, the timing when the shift to the open/close execution mode is started, and the shift to the open/close execution mode is performed The timing may be either the timing at which the opening effect is performed or the timing at which the opening/closing execution mode ends. With this configuration, when the jackpot result occurs, it is possible to initialize the setting to execute the pending notice that has been set up to that point.

Further, when the pending information is newly stored in a situation where the pending information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the pending state, it may be possible to make a decision to give a pending notice for the pending information. In this case, in the situation where the hold information that triggers execution of the hold notice is stored, when the jackpot result is obtained in the game times related to the hold information that is the start target before the hold information. May be configured to delete the already set setting indicating that the pending notice should be executed. When the setting indicating that the suspension notice should be executed is erased, the timing when the game times that result in the jackpot result is finished, the timing when the shift to the open/close execution mode is started, and the shift to the open/close execution mode is performed The timing may be either the timing at which the opening effect is performed or the timing at which the opening/closing execution mode ends. With this configuration, when the jackpot result occurs, it is possible to initialize the setting to execute the pending notice that has been set up to that point.

(23) In each of the above embodiments, the effective line is not limited to a straight line, and may be set as a line having a bend. Further, the aspect of the design is not limited to that of each of the above-described embodiments, and is arbitrary.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, a state corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result is set as the relatively advantageous predetermined game state, and a state corresponding to the normal jackpot result is set as the relatively disadvantageous predetermined game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a relatively advantageous predetermined game state and a disadvantageous predetermined game state may be set due to the difference in the number of games in which the high-frequency support mode is continued in the electric accessory 34a after the opening/closing execution mode. .. Further, a relatively advantageous predetermined game state and a disadvantageous predetermined game state may be set depending on the difference in the number of games in which the high probability mode after the opening/closing execution mode is continued. Further, a relatively advantageous predetermined game state and a disadvantageous predetermined game state may be set depending on whether or not the electric accessory 34a enters the high frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode.

(24) Hold information related to winning in the upper working opening 33 and hold information related to winning in the lower working opening 34 are stored separately, and the hold information related to winning in the lower working opening 34 takes precedence. A configuration in which the digestion is exhausted may be applied, or conversely, a configuration in which the reservation information related to winning in the upper operation port 33 is digested with priority may be applied. In this case, of the holding information acquired based on the winning of the upper working opening 33 and the holding information acquired based on the winning of the lower working opening 34, the former holding information is set as a trigger for executing the holding notice. The configuration may be such that the suspension information may be obtained, or the latter suspension information may be set as a trigger for execution of the suspension notice.

Further, in the above configuration, the plurality of operating ports are not arranged side by side in the vertical direction, but the first operating port corresponding to the upper operating port 33 and the second operating port corresponding to the lower operating port 34 are provided on the left and right. The structure may be arranged in parallel, or both of these operating ports may be arranged obliquely. Furthermore, depending on the operation mode of the firing handle 54, both operation ports may be arranged apart from each other so that only the first operation port or only the second operation port can be won. In this case, it is possible for the player to aim only at one of the first working opening and the second working opening according to the suspension notice.

Further, in the above-mentioned configuration, the main display section 43 displays the result of the determination of whether or not the hold information acquired based on the winning of the upper working opening 33 is determined, and the main display section 43 is acquired based on the winning of the lower working opening 34. You may provide the 2nd display area which displays the result of the judgment of right or wrong of the hold information. In this case, the variable display of the pattern is displayed in the first display area based on the fact that the hold information acquired based on the winning on the upper operation opening 33 becomes the object of the hit determination. Is started and the stop display corresponding to the win/fail judgment is displayed, and the variation display for one game is ended. In addition, based on the fact that the hold information acquired based on the winning of the lower working opening 34 is the target of the hit determination, or based on the hit determination, the variable display of the pattern is displayed in the second display area. At the same time as the start, the stop result corresponding to the hit determination is displayed, and the variation display for one game is ended.

(25) Depending on whether the hold information related to winning on the upper working opening 33 is the target of the winning/disabling judgment, or the holding information related to winning on the lower working opening 34 is the target of the winning/failing judgment. The profits obtained may be different. For example, in the configuration as described in (24) above, in which the holding information related to the winning of the lower working opening 34 is preferentially consumed, the holding information related to the winning of the lower working opening 34 is the target of the winning/discarding judgment. In this case, the player may be more advantageous than the case where the hold information relating to the winning of the winning on the upper operation opening 33, which is not prioritized in the execution of the win/loss determination, is the target of the win/loss determination.

(26) In each of the above-described embodiments, the hold information is acquired based on the winning of the upper operation opening 33 or the lower operation opening 34, but the present invention is not limited to this. The hold information may be acquired based on the operation of the start lever. In short, the condition for obtaining the hold information is arbitrary.

(27) In each of the above-described embodiments, one game time on the main display unit 43 is started based on whether or not the main control device 81 makes a win/fail judgment, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, based on the fact that the game times are started at a timing before the timing at which the win/loss determination is actually performed when the conditions for making the win/fail determination in the main controller 81 are satisfied, and then the win/loss determination is performed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which subsequent variable display patterns, variable display times, and stop results during the game play are determined. In this case, in the main control device 81, when it is the start timing of the game time, first, the variation command is transmitted, and after that, when the winning/failing determination, the determination of the variation display time and the type determination are performed, the variation time command and The type command may be transmitted, or the transmission timings of the variable time command and the type command may be shifted. However, the timing at which the variable time command and the type command are transmitted needs to be the timing until the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 is switched from the high speed variation to the low speed variation.

(28) In the above embodiments, the display control device 212 is controlled by the voice lamp control device 82 based on the command output from the main control device 81. However, instead of this, the main control device is controlled. The display control device 212 may control the audio lamp control device 82 based on a command output from the output device 81. Further, instead of the configuration in which the audio lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212 are separately provided, both control devices 82 and 212 may be provided as one sub-side control device. Further, in each of the embodiments other than the second embodiment, the functions of the voice lamp control device 82 or the display control device 212 may be integrated in the main control device 81, and the voice lamp control device 82. The functions of both the display control device 212 and the display control device 212 may be integrated in the main control device 81.

(29) The notification means for which the holding notice is given is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and the holding notice is given on the display screen of the display device provided separately from the symbol display device 41. Alternatively, the decoration may be provided in a movable manner to give a predetermined notice, and the hold notice may be given. Alternatively, a predetermined light emitting portion may be turned on to give the hold notice. The configuration may be such that a hold notice is given by the output of a sound from a section, or a hold notice is given by a combination of all or some of the above-described aspects.

In this case, it is preferable to limit the execution of the reservation notice according to the operation mode corresponding to the acquired reservation information. For example, if the voice output time corresponding to the obtained hold information is shorter than the voice output time corresponding to the hold notice under the configuration in which the hold notice is given by the sound output from the speaker unit, the hold information is changed. A sound corresponding to the hold notice may be output even though the corresponding various operations have ended. In this case, the harmony between the voice output time and the various operation times is impaired, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness and may affect the operation of subsequent game times. On the other hand, by restricting the execution of the hold notice according to the operation form corresponding to the acquired hold information, it is possible to achieve harmony between the operation form corresponding to the hold information and the hold notice operation mode. it can.

(30) In each of the above embodiments, the stop line is determined, and the stop result is determined by determining the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the stop line. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the left line L1 is used, for example. The stop result may be determined by determining the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed. This makes it possible to omit the stop line determination process.

(31) In each of the above embodiments, when the reach display occurs in the game times before the game times related to the hold information that triggered the execution of the hold announcement, the hold announcement is executed. Not limited to this, for example, when the reach display occurs in the game times prior to the game times related to the hold information that triggered the execution of the hold notice, when the reach display occurs, the variable display that does not correspond to the hold notice in the game time is displayed. It may be configured to execute the hold notice and not execute the hold notice until the game times related to the hold information that has triggered the execution of the hold notice. Specifically, when the reach display is generated, the process of deleting the advance notice condition establishment flag may be executed.

(32) In each of the above-described embodiments, the stop result is not changed when the condition of the reservation notice is satisfied during the variable display that causes the reach. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the condition of the hold notice is satisfied, the control may be performed so that the suspension result corresponds to the hold notice. Specifically, in the game times where the reach occurs, when the condition of the reservation notice is satisfied while all the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 are being displayed at high speed, the symbols are designed so that the suspension result corresponds to the suspension notice. It is preferable that the replacement process be executed. Thereby, the execution frequency of the reservation notice can be further increased.

Further, even when the variable display in the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped, when the lower symbol row Z3 is changing at high speed, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, the stop result of the upper symbol row Z1, and Based on the announcement symbol, it may be configured to execute a process of replacing the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 so that the stop result corresponding to the suspension announcement is obtained.

(33) In the above-described third embodiment, as the hold notice corresponding to the notice symbol, the hold notice with the same symbol as the notice symbol is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the second implementation As in the form of, when the notice symbol is a specific symbol, the stop result corresponds to the notice of suspension by the specific symbol, while the notice symbol is a non-specific symbol, the notice of suspension by the non-specific symbol is supported. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the above-mentioned stop result is obtained. In short, as a pre-stage of the process for setting the disengagement normal reach stop result corresponding to the hold notice, it is determined whether the hold notice corresponding to the notice symbol can be executed without changing the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2. It is sufficient to provide a process for

Further, in the third embodiment, when the suspension notice corresponding to the notice symbol can be executed without changing the stop result of the middle symbol sequence Z2, the stop result and the notice symbol of the middle symbol sequence Z2. Although the stop line information and the symbol combination information are uniquely determined from the type information of the above, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration for executing the processing shown in the first embodiment or the second embodiment. May be In this case, various stop results can be displayed. However, the present embodiment is superior from the viewpoint of reducing the processing load.

(34) In the fourth embodiment, when all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are changing at high speed, it is determined whether or not the notice symbol is stopped in the middle symbol row Z2. Instead of this, the configuration may be made after execution of the process of grasping the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2.

In this case, instead of the processing of step S3113 and step S3114, it is determined whether or not the notice symbol is stopped in the upper symbol sequence Z1, and if it is determined that the notice symbol is not stopped in the upper symbol sequence Z1. While ending this process as it is, if it is determined that the symbol for notice in the upper symbol sequence Z1 is stopped, the lower symbol sequence stop result correction process may be executed. Even in this case, the same effect as that of the fourth embodiment can be obtained.

In such a configuration, when the notice symbol does not stop in the middle symbol row Z2, the pending notice execution restriction flag is set, and after the process of step S3103 is executed, whether or not the pending notice execution restriction flag is stored. It is also possible to make a determination and, if the flag is stored, end this processing, and delete the pending notice execution restriction flag in the fluctuation ending processing. As a result, in the normal reach display, when the suspension notice by the notice symbol cannot be executed without changing the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 is grasped, and the notice is given to the middle symbol row Z2. It is possible to prevent the determination process of whether or not the symbol is stopped from being repeated, and to reduce the processing load.

(35) In the fourth embodiment, in the reach correspondence process, the stop result of the middle symbol row Z2 (when the high-speed variable display of the upper symbol row Z1 is finished, the upper symbol is additionally added to this. If it is possible to execute a hold notice with the same symbol as the notice symbol without changing the stop result of the column Z1), the hold notice is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second implementation As in the form of, when the notice symbol is a specific symbol, the notice of holding by the specific symbol is executed, while when the symbol for notice is a non-specific symbol, the notice of holding by the non-specific symbol is executed. It may be configured.

In the above configuration, in a situation where all the symbol strings are changing at high speed, the execution condition of the hold notice is satisfied, and the notice symbol relating to the hold notice is a non-specific symbol, and is stopped in the middle symbol sequence Z2. If the non-specific symbol to be displayed does not exist, instead of displaying the preset stop result, the stop result may be corrected so that the stop result does not correspond to the suspension notice. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach symbol is included in the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2, and it is determined that the reach symbol is included in the symbols that are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2. In this case, the process of changing the reach symbol to the symbol which is not stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2 may be executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation for a game that may occur due to the execution of the suspension notice according to the specific symbol, although the result of the stop of the game time related to the suspension notice is usually a big hit.

(36) In the third embodiment, in the change table referred to in step S2903, a combination of jackpot symbols is displayed in a stopped state, and a stop corresponding to a hold notice by a symbol other than the notice symbol is displayed. Although the result is displayed and the configuration is set as the change target, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the case where the stop result corresponding to the hold notice by the symbol other than the notice symbol is displayed is changed. It may be excluded. In this case, in the changing process executed in step S2905, only the process of changing the reach line is necessary, and the process of changing the reach pattern is not necessary. As a result, the configuration can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

(37) In the fourth embodiment, in the lower symbol row stop result correction table, the correction stop result of the lower symbol row Z3 is set so that the combination of the big hit symbols is not stopped and displayed. In this case, the reach symbol and the reach line are uniquely determined on the basis of the type of the symbol for notice, the stop result of the upper symbol row Z1 and the middle symbol row Z2, but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, the lottery is already drawn. The reach symbol may be changed to a symbol corresponding to the notice of suspension without changing the reach line determined by. In this case, by changing the reach symbol, it is determined whether the combination of jackpot symbols is stopped or displayed, or whether the stop result corresponding to the hold notice by a symbol other than the notice symbol is displayed. Alternatively, the reach line may be changed. However, the fourth mode is superior from the viewpoint of reducing the processing load.

(38) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a special area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine in which a right is generated when a ball enters and a big hit, a pachinko machine provided with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball.

(39) As long as the characteristic configurations of the first to fourth embodiments and the configurations of the other embodiments described above can be effectively brought to the attention of the game, They may be applied to each other in any combination.

<Regarding Invention Groups Extracted from the Above Embodiments>
The features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. Note that, in the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses, etc., but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses, etc. In addition, the invention described in each of the following characteristic groups, "for example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, the jackpot game is triggered by the entry of the gaming ball into the starting ball entering section provided in the game area. A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to a predetermined game state such as a state, etc. Further, for example, in a display device provided in the game area, the variable display of the pattern is started based on the fact that the lottery is performed, In the final stop display of the variable display, a display effect for one game is executed in which a stop result corresponding to the above-mentioned lottery result is displayed. Is, for example, after the display effect for one game is executed, the variable ball entrance device provided in the game area is opened and closed, and the game balls are paid out according to the number of balls entered into the variable ball entrance device. In addition, when the game ball enters the starting entrance part while the variable display of the pattern is being performed, the information used for the winning lottery is the upper limit of a predetermined number (for example, 4). There is a pachinko gaming machine that is designed to be stored as a hold.When the storage is held, a winning lottery is performed using the information stored and stored after the variable display of the pattern ends, The variable display of the pattern is started (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2004-81853).The game in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration is a game in which a game ball is fired so that a ball is inserted into the starting ball entry part, It can be said that it consists of a game of confirming whether or not the lottery result is hit when a ball is entered into the starting ball entering section, and with regard to the former game, starting ball entering until the upper limit of the reserved memory is reached. The player pays attention to whether or not a ball enters the club, and regarding the latter game, the mode of variable display of the pattern is likely to result in a stop result corresponding to the transition to the jackpot gaming state. Regarding the background art "whether or not the player pays attention", "Here, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game by diversifying the game in the gaming machine. In order to achieve, in the game of shooting the game ball as described above, a method of diversifying the flow-down mode of the game ball in the game area can be considered, and as described above, whether or not the lottery result is won every game time. It is possible to diversify the display pattern of the display effect that is performed for each game in the game of confirming whether or not. There are limits even if you try Regarding the latter, even if the display pattern for each game is diversified, there is still a limit in increasing the attention to the game. The invention has been made with the problem to be solved.

Features A1. An information acquisition unit (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that acquires special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquired information storage means (holding area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with a prescribed number, which is predetermined as a plurality of numbers, as an upper limit,
In the case where the special information stored in the acquired information storage means determines whether or not the special information corresponds to predetermined additional information and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. Includes a grant determination means (a function of executing a win/fail judgment process in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81) that sequentially performs the grant determination on the plurality of pieces of special information.
Benefits granting means (main control) for granting a privilege to the player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being the granting correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the granting information A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the device 81),
Prior to the grant determination unit making the grant determination or based on the grant determination unit making the grant determination, the game diverting operation is started and corresponds to the result of the grant determination unit. As the result of the notification, the operation for ending the game use is regarded as one time of the game use, and the operation for the game use of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means for controlling a predetermined notification means (a function of executing a variation start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, a function of performing a variation display control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game time control means determines the mode information corresponding to the operation mode when the game time operation is performed in each game time, based on the result of the award determination, the mode information determination means (display controller 212). The function for executing the variation start process in the MPU 252) is provided, and when the game use operation of each game time is performed, the game use operation is performed in the operation mode according to the mode information determined by the mode information determination means. Is to
Information that reflects the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the addition determination is set before the predetermined special information becomes the target of the addition determination. A destination specifying unit (a function of executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) specified at timing;
The special notification corresponding to the information specified by the destination specifying unit for the predetermined special information is the special information targeted for the assignment determination before the predetermined special information specified by the destination specifying unit. Special notification control means to be executed by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the predetermined notification means in a situation in which the game time related to is being performed (stop result setting corresponding to the hold notice in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) A function that executes processing and a function that executes changing processing), and
Depending on the mode information determined by the mode information determining means, special notification limiting means for not executing the special notification or for restricting the execution mode thereof (stop for normal outreach corresponding to pending notice in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) Function to execute result setting process),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic A1, the timing at which the special notification corresponding to the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage unit and not subject to the assignment determination is before the particular information is subject to the assignment determination May be performed in. As a result, for the player, not only the game for confirming the acquisition determination result of the acquired special information but also the order of the allocation determination target when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. A game of confirming or predicting the result of the assignment determination target with respect to the subsequent special information is added according to the content of the special notification, thereby diversifying the game. Thereby, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

In such a configuration, when the game time operation time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determination unit and the game time operation time corresponding to the special notification are different, for example, the game time operation time corresponding to the special notification If changed to, since the game time operation time varies with the execution of the special notification, there is a possibility that a difference occurs in the digestion rate of the game time per unit time depending on the game hall. On the other hand, if the special notification is to be executed without changing the game reusing operation time, an unnatural state may occur, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness. On the other hand, depending on the mode information determined by the mode information determining means, the execution of the special notification or the execution mode thereof is limited, so that the degree of attention of the game is increased while suppressing the occurrence of the inconvenience as described above. It becomes possible.

From the above, it is possible to appropriately raise the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A2. Firing means (gaming ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a gaming ball toward the gaming area based on a launching operation by the player,
A starting ball-in portion (upper working port 33, lower working port 34) that is provided in the game region and into which game balls flowing down the game region can enter
Information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the starting ball entering part,
Acquired information storage means (holding area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with a prescribed number, which is predetermined as a plurality of numbers, as an upper limit,
In the case where the special information stored in the acquired information storage means determines whether or not the special information corresponds to predetermined additional information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. Includes a grant determination means (a function of executing a win/fail judgment process in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81) that sequentially performs the grant determination with respect to the plurality of pieces of special information.
Benefits granting means (main control) for granting a privilege to the player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being the granting correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the granting information A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the device 81),
Prior to the grant determination being made by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination made by the grant determination means, the game diverting operation is started, and the notification corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination As a result, the operation for ending the game turning is regarded as one time of the game turning, and the predetermined operation is performed such that the game turning operation for each game turning is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means for controlling the notification means (a function for executing a fluctuation start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, a function for executing a fluctuation display control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game time control means determines the mode information corresponding to the operation mode when the game time operation is performed in each game time, based on the result of the award determination, the mode information determination means (display controller 212). The function for executing the variation start process in the MPU 252) is provided, and when the game use operation of each game time is performed, the game use operation is performed in the operation mode according to the mode information determined by the mode information determination means. Is to
Information that reflects the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the addition determination is set before the predetermined special information becomes the target of the addition determination. A destination specifying unit (a function of executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) specified at timing;
The special notification corresponding to the information specified by the destination specifying unit for the predetermined special information is the special information targeted for the assignment determination before the predetermined special information specified by the destination specifying unit. Special notification control means to be executed by the predetermined notification means in a situation in which the game time is being performed (function of executing stop result setting processing corresponding to the suspension notice in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212, and A function that executes processing during fluctuation),
Depending on the mode information determined by the mode information determining means, special notification limiting means for not executing the special notification or for restricting the execution mode thereof (stop for normal outreach corresponding to pending notice in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) Function to execute result setting process),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic A2, the special notification according to the predetermined special information which is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not the target of the addition determination is before the special information is the target of the addition determination. May be performed in. Thus, for the player, not only the game that causes the game ball to enter the starting ball entering section and the game that confirms the determination result of the special information acquired based on the game ball, but also a plurality of special games. When the information is stored in the acquired information storage means, for the special information whose order of the grant determination is later, the result in the case of the grant determination is confirmed or predicted according to the content of the special notification. The game of playing is added, and the diversification of games is achieved. Thereby, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

In addition, the player grasps the award determination result of each game time by a predetermined notification means. The mode information corresponding to the operation mode of the notification means is determined by the mode information determination means based on the grant determination result. Then, the special notification is executed by the predetermined notification means. As a result, the player can naturally check the special notification if he or she wants to grasp the result of the determination of grant of each game, and even if the special notification is given, it may be overlooked. It is suppressed.

In such a configuration, according to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means, the special notification is not executed or the execution mode thereof is limited. When the operation mode according to the mode information determined by the mode information determining unit and the mode corresponding to the special notification are different, the game playing operation time according to the mode information determined by the mode information determining unit, and the special notification game It is assumed that the diversion operation time is different. In this case, for example, when the game time operation time is changed to execute the special notification, the game time operation time changes with the execution of the special notification, so the game time per unit time is changed by the game hall. There may be a difference in the digestibility of. On the other hand, if a special notification is to be executed without changing the game reusing operation time, for example, an unnatural state may occur, and the player may feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, according to the mode information determined by the mode information determination means as described above, the execution of the special notification or the execution mode thereof is limited, thereby suppressing the occurrence of the above inconvenience and paying attention to the game. It is possible to increase the degree.

From the above, it is possible to appropriately raise the degree of attention to the game.

Features A3. A pattern display means for variably displaying the pattern on the display screen (display screen G),
Firing means (gaming ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a gaming ball toward the gaming area based on a launching operation by the player,
A starting ball-in portion (upper working port 33, lower working port 34) that is provided in the game region and into which game balls flowing down the game region can enter
Information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the starting ball entering part,
Acquired information storage means (holding area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with a prescribed number, which is predetermined as a plurality of numbers, as an upper limit,
In the case where the special information stored in the acquired information storage means determines whether or not the special information corresponds to predetermined transfer information and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. Includes a transfer determination means (a function of executing a win/fail judgment process in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81) that sequentially performs the transfer determination on the plurality of pieces of special information.
Based on the result of the transfer determination by the transfer determining means being a transfer correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the transfer information, the game state is transferred to a predetermined predetermined game state. State transition means (function to execute the game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
The variable display of the pattern is started on the pattern display means before the migration determination is performed by the migration determination means or based on the migration determination performed by the migration determination means, and the migration determination is determined. Displaying a notification result corresponding to the result and ending the variable display of the pattern is one of the game times, and the variable display of the pattern of each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means for controlling the pattern display means so as to be performed (a function of executing a variation start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, a function of performing a variation display control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game time control means determines the mode information corresponding to the display mode when the variable display of the pattern is performed based on the result of the shift determination at each game time (display control device 212). Of the MPU 252), and when the variable display of the pattern at each game time is performed, a display mode according to the mode information determined by the mode information determination means is displayed on the display screen. Is something that
Information that reflects the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the transfer determination is set before the predetermined special information becomes the target of the transfer determination. A destination specifying unit (a function of executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the MPU 202 of the main control unit 81) specified at timing;
The display mode of the game times related to the special information that is the target of the shift determination before the predetermined special information that is the target of identification by the destination specifying unit is specified by the destination specifying unit for the predetermined special information. Special notification control means for performing a special notification by setting a special mode corresponding to the information (a function for executing the stop result setting processing corresponding to the suspension notice in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 and a changing processing) Function)
Depending on the variable display time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining unit, the special notification limiting unit (the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 holding notice in advance to prevent the special notification from executing or to restrict the execution mode thereof) The function to execute the stop result setting process for normal reach, which corresponds to
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the feature A3, the special notification according to the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage unit and not the target of the shift determination is before the special information becomes the target of the shift determination. May be performed in. Thus, for the player, not only the game that causes the game ball to enter the starting ball entering unit and the game that confirms the transition determination result of the special information acquired based on the game ball, but also a plurality of special When the information is stored in the acquired information storage means, for the special information whose order of the transfer determination is later, the result when the transfer determination is targeted is confirmed or predicted according to the content of the special notification. The game of playing is added, and the diversification of games is achieved. Thereby, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

Further, the player recognizes the transition determination result of each game time by visually recognizing the display mode of the pattern on the pattern display means. The mode information according to the display mode of the design is determined by the mode information determination means based on the transition determination result. Then, by changing the display mode of the game times related to the special information that is the target of the transfer determination before the predetermined special information is the target of the transfer determination, the special mode corresponding to the content of the predetermined special information, Special notification is given. As a result, if the player is paying attention to the display screen of the pattern display means in order to grasp the transition determination result of each game, the player can naturally check the special notification, and even if the special notification is given. First, it is suppressed from being overlooked.

In such a configuration, the execution of the special notification is limited according to the variable display time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means. When the variable display time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining unit and the variable display time corresponding to the special mode are different, for example, when the variable display time is changed to display the special mode Since the variable display time fluctuates with the execution of the special notification, there is a possibility that a difference occurs in the digestion rate of the game times per unit time depending on the game hall. On the other hand, for example, when the special mode is displayed without changing the variable display time, the display mode becomes unnatural and the player may feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, according to the variable display time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means as described above, the execution of the special notification or the execution mode thereof is limited, so that the occurrence of the above inconvenience occurs. It is possible to increase the degree of attention of the game while suppressing it.

From the above, it is possible to appropriately raise the degree of attention to the game.

Features A4. A pattern display means for variably displaying the pattern on the display screen (display screen G),
Firing means (gaming ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a gaming ball toward the gaming area based on a launching operation by the player,
A starting ball-in portion (upper working port 33, lower working port 34) that is provided in the game region and into which game balls flowing down the game region can enter
Information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the starting ball entering part,
Acquired information storage means (holding area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with a prescribed number, which is predetermined as a plurality of numbers, as an upper limit,
In the case where the special information stored in the acquired information storage means determines whether or not the special information corresponds to predetermined transfer information and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. Includes a transfer determination means (a function of executing a win/fail judgment process in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81) that sequentially performs the transfer determination on the plurality of pieces of special information.
Based on the result of the transfer determination by the transfer determining means being a transfer correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the transfer information, the game state is transferred to a predetermined predetermined game state. State transition means (function to execute the game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
The variable display of the pattern is started on the pattern display means before the migration determination is performed by the migration determination means or based on the migration determination performed by the migration determination means, and the migration determination is determined. Displaying a notification result corresponding to the result and ending the variable display of the pattern is one of the game times, and the variable display of the pattern of each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means for controlling the pattern display means so as to be performed (a function of executing a variation start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, a function of performing a variation display control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game time control means determines the variable display time when the variable display of the pattern is performed based on the result of the shift determination in each game time (variable display time determining means (in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212). When a variation display of the pattern of each game is performed, a display mode corresponding to the variation display time determined by the variation display time determination means is displayed on the display screen. Is something
Information that reflects the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the transfer determination is set before the predetermined special information becomes the target of the transfer determination. A destination specifying unit (a function of executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the MPU 202 of the main control unit 81) specified at timing;
The display mode of the game times related to the special information that is the target of the shift determination before the predetermined special information that is the target of identification by the destination specifying unit is specified by the destination specifying unit for the predetermined special information. Special notification control means for performing a special notification by setting a special mode corresponding to the information (a function for executing the stop result setting processing corresponding to the suspension notice in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 and a changing processing) Function)
Depending on the variable display time determined by the variable display time determining means, special notification limiting means (not corresponding to the pending notice in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for not executing the special notification or limiting the execution mode thereof. Function to execute stop result setting process for normal reach),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic A4, the special notification according to the predetermined special information which is stored in the acquired information storage means and which is not the target of the shift determination is before the special information becomes the target of the shift determination. May be performed in. Thus, for the player, not only the game that causes the game ball to enter the starting ball entering unit and the game that confirms the transition determination result of the special information acquired based on the game ball, but also a plurality of special When the information is stored in the acquired information storage means, for the special information whose order of the transfer determination is later, the result when the transfer determination is targeted is confirmed or predicted according to the content of the special notification. The game of playing is added, and the diversification of games is achieved. Thereby, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

Further, the player recognizes the transition determination result of each game time by visually recognizing the display mode of the pattern on the pattern display means. The display mode of the design is determined according to the variable display time determined by the variable display time determining means. Then, by changing the display mode of the game times related to the special information that is the target of the transfer determination before the predetermined special information is the target of the transfer determination, the special mode corresponding to the content of the predetermined special information, Special notification is given. As a result, if the player is paying attention to the display screen of the pattern display means in order to grasp the transition determination result of each game, the player can naturally check the special notification, and even if the special notification is given. First, it is suppressed from being overlooked.

In such a configuration, the execution of the special notification or its execution mode is limited according to the variable display time determined by the variable display time determining means. When the variable display time determined by the variable display time determining means is different from the variable display time corresponding to the special mode, for example, if the variable display time is changed to display the special mode, the special notification is executed. Since the variable display time fluctuates with this, there is a possibility that a difference occurs in the digestion rate of the game times per unit time depending on the game hall. On the other hand, for example, if the special mode is displayed without changing the variable display time, the display mode becomes unnatural and the player may feel uncomfortable. On the other hand, when it is necessary to change the variable display time determined by the variable display time determining means as described above, the execution of the special notification is limited, thereby suppressing the occurrence of the inconvenience as described above. , It becomes possible to raise the attention degree of the game.

From the above, it is possible to appropriately raise the degree of attention to the game.

Features A5. The special notification restriction means does not execute the special notification when it is necessary to change the game playing operation time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determination means when the special notification is performed. The gaming machine described in the characteristic A1 or the characteristic A2, wherein the gaming machine is restricted as described above.

According to the characteristic A5, when it is necessary to change the game playing operation time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means when the special notification is performed, execution of the special notification is limited. In this case, since it is not necessary to simply execute the processing, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects while suppressing an increase in processing load, as compared with a configuration in which processing such as correction and adjustment is performed.

Features A6. A plurality of types of execution modes of the special notification are set,
The special notification control means selects any one of the plurality of types of execution modes to execute the special notification,
When the special notification is executed, the special notification restriction unit restricts a predetermined execution mode from being selected from among the plurality of types of execution modes according to the mode information determined by the mode information determination unit. The gaming machine according to the characteristic A1, the characteristic A2, or the characteristic A5, which is characterized by being a thing.

According to the characteristic A6, a plurality of types of execution modes of the special notification are set, and the special notification is executed in any one of the execution modes of the plurality of types. Here, it is restricted so that a predetermined execution mode is not selected from a plurality of types of execution modes. Thereby, for example, the special notification can be favorably executed according to the determined mode information.

Features A7. The predetermined notification means is a pattern display means for variably displaying a pattern on a display screen (display screen G),
The game time control means starts variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means before the grant determination is made by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination made by the grant determination means. Then, the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is ended as one of the game times, and according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is intended to display the variable display of the game times,
Based on the identification performed by the destination identification unit, the notification execution determination unit (the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) that determines whether or not to perform the special notification regarding the special information that is the identification target by the destination identification unit. Function for executing step S1601 and the like in
When the notification execution determining means makes a determination to perform the special notification, the special information that is the target of the determination serves as a trigger for executing the special notification,
The special notification control means is the execution result of the special notification when the stop result of the game times related to the special information which is the target of the grant determination before the special information set as the execution timing of the special notification. The special notification is made by making a special mode corresponding to the content of the special information set as
When the stop result cannot be set to the special mode without changing the variable display time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining unit, the special notification restriction unit determines that the stop result is the special mode. The gaming machine according to the characteristic A5 or the characteristic A6, characterized in that the gaming machine is restricted so as not to be an aspect.

According to the characteristic A7, since the special notification is performed in the form of the stop result in each game time, the timing of the special notification is clear to the player, and the possibility of missing the special notification is reduced.

Here, since the stop result corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining unit is displayed at the elapse timing of the variable display time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining unit, the mode of the stop result is displayed. In the configuration of performing the special notification, the stop result of the special mode may not be stopped depending on the elapse timing of the variable display time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determination means. In such a case, if the variable display time is changed in order to display the special mode, the variable display time will be changed by the special notification. On the other hand, if the stop result is changed to the special mode without changing the variable display time, the player may feel uncomfortable when the mode is changed, and the process may be complicated. On the other hand, according to this feature, when the variable display time needs to be changed in order to change the mode of the stop result to the special mode, execution of the display of the special mode is limited. This makes it possible to increase the degree of interest in the game while suppressing the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

Feature A8. As the variable display of the pattern, the pattern display means variably displays the pattern in each of a plurality of variable display areas (symbol rows Z1 to Z3) on the display screen.
The stop result of at least the specific variation display area, which is a part of the plurality of variation display areas, is configured to correspond to the variation display time of the corresponding game time, at least in a specific situation,
In the case where the special notification limiting means does not correspond to the special mode according to the special information set as the trigger of the execution of the special notification in the specific situation, the stop result of the specific variation display area is the special mode. The gaming machine according to feature A7, which is restricted so as not to become.

According to the characteristic A8, at least in a specific situation, at least the stop result of the specific variation display area and the variation display time of the corresponding game time are associated with each other, so that the storage capacity to be stored in advance can be reduced. Is possible.

Even in this case, the effect described in the feature A1 or the feature A2 can be obtained by limiting the execution of the special notification according to the stop result of the specific variation display area.

Features A9. In the specific variation display area, a plurality of patterns can be stopped and displayed at the same time,
Any of the plurality of patterns stopped and displayed in the specific variation display area includes a corresponding pattern corresponding to the special mode corresponding to the special information set as the trigger of the execution of the special notification. A pattern specifying means (a function of executing the process of step S2007 or step S2308 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for specifying
The special notification control means, when it is specified by the pattern specifying means that the corresponding pattern is included, controls to be a special mode using the pattern,
Feature A8 is characterized in that the special notification limiting means limits the special pattern so that the special mode is not obtained when the pattern specifying means specifies that the corresponding pattern is not included. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic A9, in the case where it is specified by the pattern specifying means that the specific variation display area includes the corresponding pattern corresponding to the special aspect corresponding to the special information set as the trigger for executing the special notification. In this case, a special notice is given when the special mode using the design is adopted.

On the other hand, if it is determined by the pattern specifying means that the specific variation display area includes a corresponding pattern corresponding to the special aspect corresponding to the special information set as the trigger for executing the special notification, the It is restricted so that it is not an aspect. As a result, it is possible to obtain the effect described in the characteristic A1 or the characteristic A2 while increasing the chance of executing the special notification.

Feature A10. When the special notification limiting unit specifies that the plurality of patterns stopped and displayed in the specific variable display area include both the corresponding pattern and a pattern different from the corresponding pattern, by the pattern specifying unit The gaming machine according to Feature A9, wherein the gaming machine is limited to a special mode relating to the corresponding pattern while preventing a special mode relating to the different pattern.

According to the characteristic A10, if the picture specifying means specifies that the plurality of pictures stopped and displayed in the specific variable display area include both the corresponding picture and a picture different from the corresponding picture, the picture is stopped. The result is limited to the special aspect relating to the corresponding design while preventing the special aspect relating to the different design. This prevents the special aspect from being displayed due to the different pattern. Therefore, it is possible to satisfactorily associate the game times relating to the special information set as a trigger for executing the special notification with the game times for which the special notification is performed.

Feature A11. The game time control means, on a predetermined one effective line on the display screen, shows a mode of the result of stopping the game time performed by the special information corresponding to the additional information being a target of the additional determination. In the embodiment, the combination of the addition target patterns formed by the patterns variably displayed in the plurality of variable display areas is stopped and displayed.
The special notification control means, as the special mode, the stop result of the game times related to the special information that is the target of the grant determination, prior to the special information set as the trigger of the execution of the special notification. A combination formed by the patterns that are variably displayed in the variable display area, and a combination of special notification target patterns that is different from the combination of the assignment target patterns is stopped and displayed on the effective line or at a position different from the effective line. Is a mode of
The game machine according to any one of features A8 to A10, wherein the special notification restriction means restricts a combination of the special notification target patterns so as not to be stopped and displayed.

According to the characteristic A11, the combination of the symbols to be given is stopped and displayed on the activated line of 1 in the game times that are the result of the giving correspondence, so that the player can clearly understand the result of the giving correspondence. it can. In this case, since the combination of the special notification target patterns is stopped and displayed at the game time when the special notification is performed, it is possible for the player to clearly understand that it is a result of the assignment correspondence.

In such a configuration, when the stop result of the specific variation display area does not correspond to the combination of the special notification target patterns according to the special information set as a trigger for executing the special notification, the combination of the special notification target patterns is displayed. Be restricted not to be. This prevents the fluctuation display time from fluctuating due to the special notification.

Feature A12. The combination of the special notification target patterns is set as a mode in which the patterns forming the combination of the addition target patterns are stopped and displayed in each of the plurality of variable display areas,
In the case where the special notification limiting unit requires a change in the stop result of the specific variation display area, when the combination of the special notification target patterns corresponding to the special information set as the trigger of the execution of the special notification is stopped and displayed. The game machine according to Feature A11, wherein the combination of the special notification target patterns is restricted so as not to be stopped and displayed.

According to the feature A12, it becomes possible to make the combination mode of the special notification target patterns similar to the combination mode of the grant target patterns, and when the combination of the special notification target patterns is stopped and displayed, it corresponds to the special notification. This makes it easier for the player to understand.

In such a configuration, when the combination of the special notification target patterns is displayed and the stop result of the specific variation display area needs to be changed, the stop display of the combination of the special notification target patterns is limited. As a result, the change in the stop result of the specific variation display area associated with the special notification is suppressed, and thus the variation display time associated with the special notification is suppressed.

Features A13. In each game time, based on the result of the award determination, a variable display time determining means for determining a variable display time when the variable display of the pattern is performed is provided, and the aspect information determining means is the variable display time determining means. Determines the mode information corresponding to the variable display time determined by
In the display mode corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means, as a previous step of stopping the variable display, one of the plurality of preset active lines in the display screen is displayed on one active line. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a reach pattern (reach pattern) in which the combination of the given target patterns may be established, and under the situation where the reach line is formed, as the specific variation display area. It includes a mode to display reach variation by the final stop display area of
At least the display mode of the game times in which the specific reach variation display is performed is such that the period from the variation start timing to the timing at which the specific reach variation display is started becomes a predetermined period in the final stop display area. Is set so that the mode at the timing when the specific reach variation display is started is set to a predetermined mode, the stop result of the final stop display area is at least the specific mode. At the game times where reach variation display is performed, it is configured to correspond to the variation display time,
When the stop result of the final stop display area does not correspond to the combination of the special notification target patterns according to the special information set as the trigger of the execution of the special notification, the special notification restriction unit is the special notification target. The gaming machine described in the characteristic A11 or the characteristic A12, which is limited so as not to be a combination of pictures.

According to the characteristic A13, in the specific reach variation display, the period from the variation start timing to the timing at which the specific reach variation display is started is a predetermined period, and the specific reach variation display is started. The stop result of the final stop display area corresponds to the variable display time because the mode at the timing to be performed is the predetermined mode. As a result, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for displaying the patterns in a variable manner.

In this case, if the stop result of the final stop display area is changed to stop and display the combination of the special notification target patterns according to the special information set as the trigger of execution of the special notification, the variable display time is changed. Becomes On the other hand, according to this feature, in the specific reach variation display, the stop result of the final stop display area is a combination of the special notification target patterns according to the special information that is set as an opportunity to execute the special notification. If they do not correspond, it is restricted so as not to be a combination of the special notification target patterns. As a result, changes in the variable display time that accompany the execution of the special notification are suppressed.

Feature A14. As the display mode of the pattern in the variable display of the pattern, a high-identification display mode and a low-identification display mode in which the distinctiveness of the pattern by the appearance is relatively high and low are set,
The display mode of the game times in which the specific reach variation display is performed, the display mode of the pattern in the final stop display area is changed from the low identification display mode to the high identification display mode at the timing when the specific reach variation display is started. It is set to switch to the state displayed in
When the combination of the special notification target patterns is stopped and displayed, the special notification limiting unit restricts the combination of the special notification target patterns when the stop result of the final stop display area needs to be changed. The game machine according to feature A13, which is characterized by being a thing.

According to the characteristic A14, in the specific reach variation display, the pattern in the final stop display area is switched from the low identification display mode to the high identification display mode at the timing when the specific reach variation display is started. This allows the player to confirm the pattern that is being variably displayed. Here, if it is attempted to change the stop result of the final stop display area without changing the variable display time, it is necessary to replace the pattern and change the speed of the variable display, which gives the player a feeling of strangeness and Will be complicated. On the other hand, according to this feature, it is necessary to change the stop result in the final stop display area when displaying a combination of special notification target patterns according to special information set as a trigger for execution of special notification. If this occurs, execution of special notification is restricted. This avoids the above problem.

Feature A15. The special notification control means, in the final stop display area, by determining as a reach pattern a pattern that constitutes a combination of special notification target patterns corresponding to the special information set as a trigger of the execution of the special notification. In a situation in which the pattern stopped and displayed corresponding to the variable display time constitutes a combination of the special notification target patterns, the special notification is performed.
The special notification limiting means is a combination of special notification target patterns corresponding to special information in which the pattern stopped and displayed in the final stop display area in association with the variable display time is set as a trigger for execution of the special notification. The game machine according to the feature A13 or the feature A14, characterized in that the pattern corresponding to the variable display time is stopped and displayed as it is in a situation where the pattern does not constitute the pattern.

According to the characteristic A15, by the process of determining the reach pattern, the special notification is executed in the situation where the pattern stopped and displayed corresponding to the variable display time in the final stop display area constitutes the combination of the special notification target patterns. The special notification corresponding to the special information set as the trigger of is executed. On the other hand, in the final stop display area, in a situation where the picture stopped and displayed corresponding to the variable display time is not a picture forming a combination of special notification target pictures, the picture corresponding to the variable display time is stopped and displayed as it is. As a result, in the game times in which a specific reach variation display is performed, it is possible to execute special notification corresponding to the special information that is set as a good opportunity to execute the special notification, and the fluctuation accompanying the execution of the special notification. Changes in display time are suppressed.

Feature A16. The special notification restriction means is a combination of special notification target patterns corresponding to special information in which the pattern stopped and displayed in the final stop display area in association with the variable display time is set as a trigger for execution of the special notification. The gaming machine according to Feature A15, wherein the reach pattern is displayed so that the combination of the special notification target patterns using the pattern is not stopped and displayed in a situation where the pattern does not constitute the pattern.

According to the characteristic A16, by the process of determining the reach pattern, it is possible to execute the special notification corresponding to the special information set as the trigger of the special notification, and set as the trigger of the special notification. It is possible to restrict the execution of special notification that does not correspond to the existing special information. Therefore, it is possible to associate the game times related to the special information that triggered the execution of the special notification with the game times for which the special notification is executed.

Feature A17. State setting means for setting a special notification state based on the fact that the identification result by the destination identification means is a predetermined identification result (function to execute the setting process of the hold command in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
When the special notification state is set, the patterns forming the combination of the special notification target patterns corresponding to the special information that triggered the setting, the game in which the specific reach variation display is performed in the special notification state A reach pattern determining means for determining a reach pattern for the first time (a function of executing step S2402 or the like in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212);
Equipped with
The special notification control means is a game game in which the specific reach fluctuation display is performed in the special notification state, and the special notification that the pattern stopped and displayed corresponding to the fluctuation display time in the final stop display area is the current special notification. In a situation that constitutes a combination of special notification target patterns corresponding to the state, by displaying the reach pattern determined by the reach pattern determination means, of the special notification target pattern corresponding to the current special notification state The combination is stopped and displayed,
The special notification restriction means is a game game in which the specific reach variation display is performed in the special notification state, and the special notification that the pattern stop-displayed corresponding to the variable display time in the final stop display area is the current special notification. In a situation in which the combination of special notification target patterns corresponding to the state is not configured, the reach pattern determined by the reach pattern determination means is displayed, and the pattern corresponding to the variable display time is displayed in the final stop display area. The gaming machine described in the characteristic A15 or the characteristic A16, which is displayed as it is.

According to the feature A17, when the special notification state is set, the pattern forming the combination of the special notification target patterns is determined as the reach pattern, and in the game time in which a specific reach variation display is performed in the special notification state, By displaying the determined reach pattern regardless of whether or not the pattern forming the combination of the special notification target patterns is stopped and displayed in the stop display area, the special notification is executed or the special notification is executed. There are restrictions. This simplifies the process of determining the stop result at each game time in the special notification state.

Feature A18. In the specific reach variation display, whether or not the pattern stopped and displayed in the final stop display area is a pattern forming a combination of special notification target patterns corresponding to special information set as a trigger for execution of the special notification. A pattern determining means (a function of executing steps S2007 and S2801 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for determining whether
The special notification control means, a combination of the special notification target pattern corresponding to the special information is set in the final stop display area in the stop display corresponding to the variable display time is set as a trigger of the execution of the special notification When it is determined by the pattern determination means that it is a pattern to be configured, the special notification is performed by displaying the pattern forming the combination of the special notification target patterns by combining with the determined pattern as a reach pattern. Is something that
The special notification restriction means is a combination of special notification target patterns corresponding to special information in which the pattern stopped and displayed corresponding to the variable display time in the final stop display area is set as a trigger for execution of the special notification. When it is determined by the pattern determination means that the pattern is not a constituent pattern, the reach pattern selected by the reach pattern selection means is displayed, and the pattern corresponding to the variable display time is stopped and displayed in the final stop display area as it is. The game machine according to feature A15 or feature A16, which is characterized by being a thing.

According to the characteristic A18, the pattern that is stopped and displayed in the final stop display region in correspondence with the variable display time constitutes a combination of the special notification target patterns corresponding to the special information that is set as a trigger for executing the special notification. When it is determined that it is a design, the special notification using the design is executed by displaying the design that constitutes the combination of the special notification target designs as a reach design by combining with the determined design. ..

On the other hand, when the pattern stopped and displayed corresponding to the variable display time in the final stop display area is not a pattern that constitutes a combination of special notification target patterns corresponding to the special information set as a trigger for executing the special notification, Are restricted from executing special notification. In this case, in the final stop display area, the picture corresponding to the variable display time is stopped and displayed, and the reach picture lottered by the reach picture lottery means is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the variation of the variable display time associated with the execution of the special notification while preventing the reach pattern from being biased.

Features A19. A state setting means for setting the special notification state based on the specific result by the destination specifying means was a predetermined specific result, the special notification control means, in the situation that is set to the special notification state It is a special notification,
The aspect information determination means includes a reach pattern lottery means for selecting the type of reach pattern displayed in the game time in which the specific reach variation display is performed, and the identification is performed at least in a situation where the special notification state is not set. In the game times in which the reach variation display is performed, the reach pattern is displayed by displaying the reach pattern of the type selected by the reach pattern lottery means, and the specific reach variation display is performed.
Furthermore, in the specific reach variation display, the pattern stopped and displayed in the final stop display area constitutes a combination of special notification target patterns corresponding to special information set as a trigger for execution of the special notification. A pattern determining means (a function of executing steps S2007 and S2801 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for determining whether or not
The special notification control means, a combination of the special notification target pattern corresponding to the special information is set in the final stop display area in the stop display corresponding to the variable display time is set as a trigger of the execution of the special notification When it is determined by the pattern determination means that it is a pattern to be configured, the special notification is performed by displaying the pattern forming the combination of the special notification target patterns by combining with the determined pattern as a reach pattern. Is something that
The special notification restriction means is a combination of special notification target patterns corresponding to special information in which the pattern stopped and displayed corresponding to the variable display time in the final stop display area is set as a trigger for execution of the special notification. When it is judged by the picture judging means that the picture is not a constituent picture, the reach picture drawn by the reach picture drawing means is displayed, and the picture corresponding to the variable display time is stopped and displayed in the final stop display area as it is. The gaming machine according to the feature A15 or A16, which is characterized by:

According to the feature A19, the pattern that is stopped and displayed in the final stop display region in correspondence with the variable display time constitutes a combination of special notification target patterns corresponding to the special information set as a trigger for executing the special notification. When it is determined that it is a design, the special notification using the design is executed by displaying the design that constitutes the combination of the special notification target designs as a reach design by combining with the determined design. ..

On the other hand, when the pattern stopped and displayed corresponding to the variable display time in the final stop display area is not a pattern that constitutes a combination of special notification target patterns corresponding to the special information set as a trigger for executing the special notification, Are restricted from executing special notification. In this case, in the final stop display area, the picture corresponding to the variable display time is stopped and displayed, and the reach picture lottered by the reach picture lottery means is displayed. The reach picture lottery means is used in a situation where the special notification state is not set. Thus, as a means for randomly determining the reach pattern in a situation where execution of the special notification is restricted, a reach pattern lottery means for also randomly determining the reach pattern in a situation where the special notification state is not used is also used. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the configuration while ensuring the effect of the feature A18.

Feature A20. The special notification restriction means displays the reach picture drawn by the reach picture drawing means, so that a combination of special notification target pictures not corresponding to the special information set as a trigger for executing the special notification is stopped and displayed. In such a case, the reach pattern different from the reach pattern selected by the lottery is displayed so that the combination of the special notification target patterns is not stopped and displayed, and the game according to the feature A18 or the feature A19. Machine.

According to the characteristic A20, even when the reach pattern is randomly selected by the lottery, the combination of the special notification target patterns that do not correspond to the special information set as the trigger of the special notification is stopped and displayed. A reach pattern different from the above-mentioned lottery reach pattern is displayed so that the combination of the special notification target patterns is not stopped and displayed. Thereby, while ensuring the effect of the characteristic A18 or the characteristic A19, it is possible to associate the game times related to the special information that has triggered the execution of the special notification with the game times at which the special notification is executed.

Feature A21. The additional information storage unit (sorting table storage area 222) that stores the additional information in advance is provided, and the additional information storage unit stores the first additional information (the information of the normal jackpot result stored in the sorting table as the additional information). ) And second assignment information (probability variation jackpot result information stored in the distribution table),
The privilege granting means,
Based on the result of the grant determination made by the grant determination means corresponding to the first grant information, the game state shifts to the first predetermined game state advantageous to the player. First state transition means (function of executing various transition processing after the normal jackpot result in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
Based on that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the second grant corresponding result that corresponds to the second grant information, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the first predetermined game state. A second state transition means for transitioning to a second predetermined game state (a function for executing various transition processes after the probability variation jackpot result in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81),
Equipped with
The game time control means changes the mode of the stop result of the game time, which is performed by the special information corresponding to the first addition information, as an object of the addition determination, on one effective line, the plurality of fluctuations. By setting the combination of the first giving target patterns formed by the patterns that are variably displayed in the display area to be stopped and displayed, the special information corresponding to the second giving information is the object of the giving determination. A mode of the result of stopping the game times performed is a mode in which a combination of the second grant target patterns formed by the patterns variably displayed in the plurality of variable display areas is stopped and displayed on one effective line. And
As the combination of the special notification target patterns, the combination of the first special notification target patterns formed by the patterns forming the first combination target pattern and the pattern forming the second combination of the target patterns are formed. The combination of the second special notification target pattern
In the special notification limiting means, a combination of special notification target patterns according to special information set as a trigger for executing the special notification is a combination of the first special notification target patterns, and further, the final stop display area. In the situation in which the pattern that is stopped and displayed corresponding to the variable display time constitutes the combination of the second special notification target patterns, but does not constitute the combination of the first special notification target patterns, the special pattern using that pattern is used. The gaming machine according to any one of features A13 to A20, wherein the reach pattern is displayed so that the combination of the notification target patterns is not stopped and displayed.

According to the characteristic A21, the combination of the special notification target patterns corresponding to the special information set as the trigger of the execution of the special notification is the first special notification target pattern, and the variable display time in the final stop display area is further increased. Although the pattern stopped and displayed corresponds to the combination of the second special notification target patterns, in the situation where the combination of the first special notification target patterns is not formed, the reach such that the combination of the special notification target patterns is not stopped and displayed. The design is displayed. As a result, it is restricted that the combination of the second special notification target patterns is stopped and displayed. Therefore, when the stop results are compared between the game times in which the special notification is performed and the game times that have caused the special notification, the combination of the special notification target patterns corresponding to the combination of the second addition target patterns in the former is stopped and displayed. Despite this, in the latter case, the combination of the first addition target patterns is not stopped and displayed. When such an event occurs, although the player expects to shift to the second predetermined game state by a special notification, the player actually shifts to the first predetermined game state, and such a game occurs. There is a risk that the player's willingness to play may decline. On the other hand, according to this feature, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effect while preventing a decrease in game motivation.

In addition, regarding the relationship with the feature A18, “the special notification restriction means is a combination of special notification target patterns corresponding to special information set as a trigger for execution of the special notification of the first special notification target pattern. In the combination, the design that is stopped and displayed in the final stop display region in correspondence with the variable display time is a design that constitutes a combination of the second special notification target designs, but the first special notification target design When it is judged by the picture judging means that the combination of No. is not formed, the reach picture drawn by the reach picture drawing means is displayed and the picture corresponding to the variable display time is stopped and displayed as it is in the final stop display area. It is good.

Regardless of the pattern to be stopped in the final stop display area, the pattern that constitutes the combination of the special notification target patterns corresponding to the special information set as a trigger for executing the special notification is determined as the reach pattern and displayed. In the case where the frequency at which the special information set as the trigger for executing the special notification corresponds to the first grant information and the frequency at which the special information corresponds to the second grant information are different, as the trigger for executing the special notification The frequency determined as the combination of the special notification target patterns corresponding to the set special information may be different between the combination of the first special notification target patterns and the combination of the second special notification target patterns. As a result, the reach pattern determined by the combination of the special notification target patterns may be biased.

On the other hand, according to this feature, the combination of the special notification target patterns corresponding to the special information set as a trigger for executing the special notification is the first special notification target pattern, and the final stop display The pattern that is stopped and displayed corresponding to the variable display time in the area is a pattern that constitutes the second special notification target pattern, but it is determined by the pattern determination means that it does not constitute the first special notification target pattern. In this case, the reach picture selected by the lottery is displayed. As a result, even if the frequency at which the special information corresponds to the first additional information and the frequency at which the special information corresponds to the second additional information are different, the reach pattern to be displayed is less likely to be biased. Therefore, it is possible to secure the diversity of the specific reach variation display in a situation where the frequency at which the special information corresponds to the first addition information and the frequency at which the special information corresponds to the second addition information are different.

The first predetermined game state and the second predetermined game state may be the following game states. That is, the grant determination means is a high probability grant determination means (a function of executing the process of step S803 in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) in which the probability of the grant correspondence result is relatively high, and a low probability grant determination means. (The function of executing the process of step S802 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81) is provided, and the first predetermined game state, when the award determination is made, the high-probability award determination means and the low-probability award Among the determination means, the low probability assignment determination means is a gaming state in which the assignment determination is performed, and the second predetermined game state is the high probability assignment determination means and the low probability assignment when the assignment determination is performed. Among the determination means, the high probability addition determination means may be a game state in which the addition determination is performed, thereby providing a difference in advantage between the first predetermined game state and the second predetermined game state. ..

Further, a variable ball entering means (variable winning device 32) which is provided in the game area and is capable of switching between an open state in which a game ball flowing down in the game area is easy to enter and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter the ball, Variable ball control means for executing variable ball control for switching the variable ball means to an open state and then to a closed state (function for executing a special winning opening/closing process in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81), and the variable ball And a means for giving a game ball to the player based on the fact that the game ball has entered the means, and the first predetermined game state by the first state transition means. When the transition of the game state to the occurs, the variable ball control by the variable ball control means until the number of times of switching the open state and the closed state in the variable ball entering means reaches a predetermined number of times. When the transition to the first predetermined game state is performed at the same time, and the transition of the game state to the second predetermined game state by the second state transition means occurs, the open state in the variable ball entering means is set. The variable ball entry control means may perform the variable ball entry control until the number of times of switching to the closed state reaches a predetermined number, and a transition to the second predetermined game state may be performed.

Feature A22. The display mode corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means includes, on the one active line of the plurality of preset active lines in the display screen, as a step before the variable display is stopped. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the first reach pattern combination that is a pattern forming the first combination pattern to be added, and the second combination pattern to be added is formed on another effective line. Multiple reach mode in which a reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the combination of the second reach patterns composed of Is included,
The special notification restriction means does not become a multi-reach mode in a situation where the combination of special notification target patterns corresponding to the special information set as a trigger for execution of the special notification is the combination of the first special notification target patterns. The gaming machine according to the feature A21, characterized in that the execution of the plurality of reach modes is restricted when the pattern forming the second addition target pattern is stopped and displayed in the final stop display area. ..

According to the characteristic A22, in a plurality of reach modes, in the situation where the combination of the special notification target patterns corresponding to the special information set as the trigger for executing the special notification is the combination of the first special notification target patterns, the second grant When the patterns constituting the target design are stopped and displayed in the final stop display area, the combination of the special designating target designs may be stopped and displayed by combining the second grant target design and the second reach design. On the other hand, according to this feature, in the situation where the combination of the special notification target patterns corresponding to the special information set as the trigger for executing the special notification is the combination of the first special notification target patterns, a plurality of reach modes are set. If it does not occur or if the pattern forming the second assignment target pattern is stopped and displayed in the final stop display area, execution of the multiple reach mode is restricted. As a result, the combination of the second reach picture and the picture stopped and displayed in the final stop display area prevents the special notification target picture from being stopped and displayed. Therefore, the diversification of the reach mode is attempted and the desire to play the game is not reduced.

Feature A23. The special notification control means causes the special notification to be performed using the same pattern as the pattern that constitutes the combination of the patterns to be given to the game times according to the special information set as a trigger for executing the special notification. Yes,
The special notification limiting means, in a situation where the symbols stopped and displayed corresponding to the variable display time in the final stop display area are not the same symbol, the combination of special notification target symbols using the symbols is not stopped and displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A13 to A20, wherein the reach pattern is displayed.

According to the characteristic A23, the pattern that is stopped and displayed corresponding to the variable display time in the final stop display area is the pattern that is stopped and displayed corresponding to the variable display time, which is set as a trigger for executing the special notification. When it is not the same as the pattern that constitutes the combination of the design patterns to be given in the game times related to the information, the design in which the combination of the special notification target patterns using the design is not stopped and displayed is determined as the reach pattern. As a result, the execution of the special notification using a pattern different from the pattern forming the combination of the game patterns to be given to the game times according to the special information set as a trigger for executing the special notification is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to associate the mode of the stop result with the game times in which the special notification is executed and the game times related to the special information set as the trigger of the execution of the special notification, and the display of the pattern in these consecutive game times is displayed. Aspects can be provided to the player as a series.

Regarding the relationship with the characteristic A18, "the special notification limiting means determines by the pattern determining means that the patterns stopped and displayed corresponding to the variable display time in the final stop display area are not the same patterns. In this case, it is preferable that the reach picture lottered by the reach picture lottery means is displayed and the picture corresponding to the variable display time is stopped and displayed in the final stop display area as it is.

Feature A24. The display mode corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means includes, on the one active line of the plurality of preset active lines in the display screen, as a step before the variable display is stopped. The first reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the combination of the reach patterns composed of the same pattern, and the second reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the combination of the other reach patterns on other effective lines. And includes a plurality of reach modes for performing a specific reach variation display by the final stop display area in the situation where the plurality of reach lines are formed,
The special notification limiting means prevents the multiple reach mode or the execution of the multiple reach mode when a different pattern from the same pattern is stopped and displayed in the final stop display area. The gaming machine according to feature A23, which is

According to the characteristic A24, in a plurality of reach modes, when a design different from the same design as the design that constitutes the combination of the target game designs for the game times related to the special information is stopped and displayed in the final stop display area, Execution of the reach mode is limited. As a result, the combination of the other reach patterns and the patterns that are stopped and displayed in the final stop display area does not stop and display the combination of the special notification target patterns that are different from the same pattern. Therefore, it is possible to associate the game times at which the special notification is executed with the game times related to the special information set as a trigger for executing the special notification.

Feature A25. The aspect information determining means is configured to determine a special aspect as a display aspect according to the aspect information based on a result of the assignment determination, according to any one of features A1 to A24. Amusement machine.

According to the characteristic A25, when it is necessary to change the variable display time when changing the display mode to the special mode, the execution of the special notification is limited, and thus the execution frequency of the special notification may decrease. Then, the motivation for the game may decrease. On the other hand, according to this feature, since the special notification can be executed even in the game times other than the game times in which the special notification is executed, as compared with the case where the special notification is executed only in the game times in which the special notification is executed, The frequency of notification is increased. Therefore, the special notification can be executed at an appropriate frequency.

Feature A26. The special notification control means performs a lottery means (step S1907 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for performing a lottery as to whether or not to execute the special notification for the game times which are the target of the grant determination before the special information. The game machine according to any one of the features A1 to A25, which is provided with a function of executing the processing of.

According to the characteristic A26, the special notification is executed only when the lottery means is won. As a result, the special notification may not be continuously executed. Therefore, even when the special notification is not continuously executed, it is possible to maintain the expectation of the game. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the special mode. Further, even if the special notification is restricted by the special notification restriction means, the restriction is unlikely to give the player a feeling of strangeness. As a result, the execution of the special notification can be restricted without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

Feature A27. Trigger information storage means (a function of storing a notice condition fulfillment flag in the work RAM 254 of the display control device 212) for storing the trigger information based on the identification result by the destination identification means being a predetermined identification result,
In the situation where the trigger information is stored, the special notification control means stores the special notification corresponding to the information specified by the destination specifying means when the trigger information is stored, in the situation information. In this case, the special information that becomes the specifying target of the destination specifying means and that triggers the execution of the special notification is executed at a timing before the target of the grant determination.
Further, a trigger information determining unit that determines whether or not the trigger information is stored (a function of executing the processes of steps S1505 and S1509 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212),
While it is determined that the trigger information is stored, the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit after the special information that triggered the execution of the special notification is the trigger for the execution of the special notification. Trigger information restricting means for restricting not to be set as information (a function of executing the process after making an affirmative judgment in step S1505 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212, executing the process after making an affirmative judgment in step S1509). Function)
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A26, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic A27, even if special information is newly stored in the situation where the special notification is already set, the special notification is not newly set for the special information. As a result, the special information that triggers the execution of the special notification does not exist in the acquired information storage unit in a duplicated manner, and the special information that triggers the execution of the special notification becomes clear. If the special information that triggers the execution of the special notification is duplicated, for example, it becomes necessary to consider other special information when executing the special notification related to one of the special information, which makes the processing complicated. Although there is a risk, it is possible to prevent such a situation by preventing the duplication.

Feature A28. Based on the identification performed by the destination identification unit, the notification execution determination unit (the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) that determines whether or not to perform the special notification regarding the special information that is the identification target by the destination identification unit. Function for executing the pending command support process in
The gaming machine according to Feature A27, wherein the trigger information storage unit stores the trigger information when the notification execution determination unit determines to perform the special notification.

According to the characteristic A28, it is possible to obtain the action and effect of the characteristic A27 without restricting the specific execution by the destination specifying unit. Thereby, for example, when the control subject performing the process relating to the destination specifying means and the control subject performing the process relating to the special notification are different, the information of the fact that the latter control subject decides to execute the special notice is given to the former control. There is no need for the subject to recognize.

Feature A29. An additional information correspondence determining unit that determines whether or not the special information corresponding to the additional information is stored in the acquired information storage unit (a function of executing the processes of steps S1503 and S1508 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212); ,
While it is determined that the special information corresponding to the additional information is stored in the acquired information storage unit, the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit after the special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit. Additional information corresponding restriction means for restricting information from being set as information that triggers execution of the special notification (a function of executing a process after making an affirmative judgment in step S1503 of the MPU 252 of the display control device 212, step S1508). Function that executes processing after making a positive determination in),
The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A28, which is characterized by comprising:

According to the feature A29, in the situation in which the special notification is being executed, the first predetermined game state or the second predetermined game state is performed in the game times related to the special information different from the special information that has triggered the execution of the special notification. It is possible to prevent the grant.

Feature A30. Based on the identification performed by the destination identification unit, the notification execution determination unit (the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) that determines whether or not to perform the special notification regarding the special information that is the identification target by the destination identification unit. Function for executing the pending command support process in
When the notification execution determining unit determines that the special notification is to be performed, the special information targeted for the determination is set as a trigger for executing the special notification, and thus the special notification control unit is The special notification is performed,
While it is determined that the specific information corresponding to the additional information is stored in the acquired information storage unit, the additional information corresponding restriction unit may perform the identification even if the identification is performed by the destination identification unit. The gaming machine according to feature A29, wherein the notification execution determining means restricts the determination from being performed.

According to the characteristic A30, the action and effect of the characteristic A29 can be achieved without restricting the specific execution by the destination specifying means.

Feature B1. An information acquisition unit (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that acquires special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquired information storage means (holding area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with a prescribed number, which is predetermined as a plurality of numbers, as an upper limit,
In the case where the special information stored in the acquired information storage means determines whether or not the special information corresponds to predetermined additional information and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. Includes a grant determination means (a function of executing a win/fail judgment process in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81) that sequentially performs the grant determination on the plurality of pieces of special information.
Benefits granting means (main control) for granting a privilege to the player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being the granting correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the granting information A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the device 81),
Prior to the grant determination unit making the grant determination or based on the grant determination unit making the grant determination, the game diverting operation is started and corresponds to the result of the grant determination unit. As the result of the notification, the operation for ending the game use is regarded as one time of the game use, and the operation for the game use of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means for controlling a predetermined notification means (a function of executing a variation start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, a function of performing a variation display control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game time control means determines the mode information corresponding to the operation mode when the game time operation is performed in each game time, based on the result of the award determination, the mode information determination means (display controller 212). The function for executing the variation start process in the MPU 252) is provided, and when the game use operation of each game time is performed, the game use operation is performed in the operation mode according to the mode information determined by the mode information determination means. Is to
Information that reflects the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the addition determination is set before the predetermined special information becomes the target of the addition determination. A destination specifying unit (a function of executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) specified at timing;
State setting means for setting a special notification state based on the fact that the identification result by the destination identification means is a predetermined identification result (function to execute the setting process of the hold command in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
In a situation where the special notification state is set, and when the setting is performed, in a situation where a game time before the game time related to the special information that is the identification target of the destination identification means is being performed The special notification corresponding to the specification result of the destination specifying means for the special information as the specification target is executed by the predetermined notification means or a notification means different from the specific notification means, and the game diverting operation is performed. When the special notification state is set in a predetermined period during the game replay operation in a situation where Special notification control means (a function of executing a stop result setting process and a function of performing a change-in-progress process) corresponding to a pending notice in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212, which is performed by the end timing of the operation,
When the special notification state is set in a predetermined period during the game turning operation in the situation where the game turning operation is being performed, it is determined by the aspect information determining means in the game turning. The special notification control means for restricting the execution of the special notification by the special notification control means or the execution mode thereof (the function of executing the reach handling process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212);
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic B1, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is stored in the acquired information storage means and is not the target of the addition determination is before the special information is the target of the addition determination. May be performed in. As a result, for the player, not only the game for confirming the acquisition determination result of the acquired special information but also the order of the allocation determination target when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. A game of confirming or predicting the result of the assignment determination target with respect to the subsequent special information is added according to the content of the special notification, thereby diversifying the game. Thereby, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

Furthermore, based on the fact that a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, a game ball enters the working opening) is satisfied during a predetermined period during the game revolving operation while the game revolving operation is being performed. When the special information acquired by the prior identification means is set and the special notification state is set, when the special notification corresponding to the special notification state is performed by the end timing of the game turning operation. There is. As a result, when the special notification is given, it is possible to shorten the time from when the acquisition condition is satisfied to when the special notification is executed, which increases the opportunity for the player to confirm the special notification. To be

In such a configuration, when the game time operation time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determination unit and the game time operation time corresponding to the special notification are different, for example, the game time operation time corresponding to the special notification If changed to, since the game time operation time varies with the execution of the special notification, there is a possibility that a difference occurs in the digestion rate of the game time per unit time depending on the game hall. On the other hand, if a special notification is to be executed without changing the game repurpose operation time in a situation where the game repurpose operation has already been performed, an unnatural state may occur, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness. On the other hand, if the special notification state is set in a predetermined period during the game turning operation in the situation where the game turning operation is being performed, it is determined by the mode information determining means in the game turning. The execution of the special notification by the special notification control means or the execution mode thereof is restricted according to the mode information being performed, so that it is possible to increase the attention level of the game while suppressing the occurrence of the inconvenience as described above. ..

From the above, it is possible to appropriately raise the degree of attention to the game.

Feature B2. Firing means (gaming ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a gaming ball toward the gaming area based on a launching operation by the player,
A starting ball-in portion (upper working port 33, lower working port 34) that is provided in the game region and into which game balls flowing down the game region can enter
Information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the starting ball entering part,
Acquired information storage means (holding area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with a prescribed number, which is predetermined as a plurality of numbers, as an upper limit,
In the case where the special information stored in the acquired information storage means determines whether or not the special information corresponds to predetermined additional information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. Includes a grant determination means (a function of executing a win/fail judgment process in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81) that sequentially performs the grant determination with respect to the plurality of pieces of special information.
Benefits granting means (main control) for granting a privilege to the player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being the granting correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the granting information A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the device 81),
Prior to the grant determination being made by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination made by the grant determination means, the game diverting operation is started, and the notification corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination As a result, the operation for ending the game turning is regarded as one time of the game turning, and the predetermined operation is performed such that the game turning operation for each game turning is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means for controlling the notification means (a function for executing a fluctuation start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, a function for executing a fluctuation display control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game time control means determines the mode information corresponding to the operation mode when the game time operation is performed in each game time, based on the result of the award determination, the mode information determination means (display controller 212). The function for executing the variation start process in the MPU 252) is provided, and when the game use operation of each game time is performed, the game use operation is performed in the operation mode according to the mode information determined by the mode information determination means. Is to
Information that reflects the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the addition determination is set before the predetermined special information becomes the target of the addition determination. A destination specifying unit (a function of executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) specified at timing;
State setting means for setting a special notification state based on the fact that the identification result by the destination identification means is a predetermined identification result (function to execute the setting process of the hold command in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
In a situation where the special notification state is set, and when the setting is performed, in a situation where a game time before the game time related to the special information that is the identification target of the destination identification means is being performed A situation in which the special notification corresponding to the specification result of the destination specifying means for the special information as the specification target is executed by the predetermined notification means, and the game diverting operation is performed. Therefore, when the special notification state is set in a predetermined period during the game turning operation, the special notification corresponding to the set special notification state is given by the end timing of the game turning operation. Special notification control means (a function for executing a stop result setting process and a function for performing a changing process) corresponding to the suspension notice in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212;
When the special notification state is set in a predetermined period during the game turning operation in the situation where the game turning operation is being performed, it is determined by the aspect information determining means in the game turning. The special notification control means for restricting the execution of the special notification by the special notification control means or the execution mode thereof (the function of executing the reach handling process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212);
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic B2, the special notification according to the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage unit and not the target of the addition determination is before the special information becomes the target of the addition determination. May be performed in. Thus, for the player, not only the game that causes the game ball to enter the starting ball entering section and the game that confirms the determination result of the special information acquired based on the game ball, but also a plurality of special games. When the information is stored in the acquired information storage means, for the special information whose order of the grant determination is later, the result in the case of the grant determination is confirmed or predicted according to the content of the special notification. The game of playing is added, and the diversification of games is achieved. Thereby, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

In addition, the player grasps the award determination result of each game time by a predetermined notification means. The mode information corresponding to the operation mode of the notification means is determined by the mode information determination means based on the grant determination result. Then, the special notification is executed by the predetermined notification means. As a result, the player can naturally check the special notification if he or she wants to grasp the result of the determination of grant of each game, and even if the special notification is given, it may be overlooked. It is suppressed.

Furthermore, based on the fact that a predetermined acquisition condition (for example, a game ball enters the working opening) is satisfied during a predetermined period during the game revolving operation while the game revolving operation is being performed. When the special information acquired by the prior identification means is set and the special notification state is set, when the special notification corresponding to the special notification state is performed by the end timing of the game turning operation. There is. As a result, when the special notification is given, it is possible to shorten the time from when the acquisition condition is satisfied to when the special notification is executed, which increases the opportunity for the player to confirm the special notification. To be

In such a configuration, when the game time operation time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determination unit and the game time operation time corresponding to the special notification are different, for example, the game time operation time corresponding to the special notification If changed to, since the game time operation time varies with the execution of the special notification, there is a possibility that a difference occurs in the digestion rate of the game time per unit time depending on the game hall. On the other hand, if a special notification is to be executed without changing the game repurpose operation time in a situation where the game repurpose operation has already been performed, an unnatural state may occur, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness. On the other hand, in the situation where the game turning operation is being performed, and when the special notification state is set in the predetermined period during the game turning operation, the aspect information determining means is used in the game turning. By restricting the execution of the special notification control means or the execution mode thereof according to the determined mode information, it is possible to increase the attention level of the game while suppressing the occurrence of the inconvenience as described above.

From the above, it is possible to appropriately raise the degree of attention to the game.

Feature B3. When the special notification limiting means is in a situation where the game turning operation is being performed and the special notification state is set during a predetermined period during the game turning operation, the special notification limiting means When the game time operation time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determination means is changed in performing the special notification, the special notification is restricted from being performed in the game time. The gaming machine described in the feature B1 or the feature B2.

According to the feature B3, even if the special game state is set and the special notification state is set during the predetermined period during the special game operation, the special game state is set in the special game state. When the game time operation time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means is changed in performing the special notification, the special notification is limited to not be performed in the game time. In this case, since it is not necessary to simply execute the processing, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects while suppressing an increase in processing load, as compared with a configuration in which processing such as correction and adjustment is performed.

Feature B4. A plurality of types of execution modes of the special notification are set,
The special notification control means selects any one of the plurality of types of execution modes to execute the special notification,
When the special notification limiting means is in a situation where the game turning operation is being performed and the special notification state is set in a predetermined period during the game turning operation, the aspect is set in the game turning. Any one of features B1 to B3 characterized in that a predetermined execution mode is restricted from being selected from among the plurality of types of execution modes according to the mode information determined by the information determination means. The game machine described.

According to the feature B4, a plurality of types of execution modes of the special notification are set, and the special notification is executed in any one of the execution modes of the plurality of types. This makes it possible to diversify the special notification.

Here, it is restricted so that a predetermined execution mode is not selected from a plurality of types of execution modes. Thus, for example, the special notification can be favorably executed according to the aspect information determined by the aspect information determining means.

Feature B5. The predetermined notifying unit is a pattern display unit (symbol display device 41) that variably displays a pattern in each of a plurality of variable display areas (symbol rows Z1 to Z3) on the display screen (display screen G),
The game time control means starts variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means before the grant determination is made by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination made by the grant determination means. Then, the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is ended as one of the game times, and according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is intended to display the variable display of the game times,
The aspect information determining means determines aspect information corresponding to a display aspect of a series of patterns on the display screen when the variable display of the symbols is performed,
The special notification control means stops the game time when the special notification state is set during a predetermined period during the variable display of the pattern in a state where the variable display of the pattern is being performed. The special notification is performed by setting the result to be a special mode corresponding to the special notification state,
The special notification limiting means is a situation where the variable display of the pattern is being performed, and when the special notification state is set in a predetermined period during the variable display of the pattern, the special notification state is set in the game time. When the variable display time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means is changed in setting the stop result to the special mode, the stop result of the game time should not be the special mode. The gaming machine according to the feature B3 or the feature B4, which is characterized by being

According to the feature B5, since the special notification is performed in the form of the stop result at each game time, the timing of the special notification is clear to the player, and the possibility of missing the special notification is reduced.

Here, even when the variable display of the pattern is being performed and the special notification state is set in the predetermined period during the variable display of the pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the aspect information When is changed to a special mode, the stop result is not a special mode in the game time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the variable display time from being changed due to the execution of the special notification.

Feature B6. The game time control means, on a predetermined one effective line on the display screen, shows a mode of the result of stopping the game time performed by the special information corresponding to the additional information being a target of the additional determination. In the embodiment, the combination of the addition target patterns formed by the patterns variably displayed in the plurality of variable display areas is stopped and displayed.
As the special mode, the special notification control means is a combination formed by the patterns variably displayed in the plurality of variable display areas, and the combination of the special notification target patterns different from the combination of the assignment target patterns is effective. It is intended to be stopped and displayed at a position different from the line or the effective line concerned.
The special notification limiting means is a situation where the variable display of the pattern is being performed, and when the special notification state is set in a predetermined period during the variable display of the pattern, the special notification state is set in the game time. When the variable display time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means is changed to stop and display the combination of the special notification target patterns corresponding to the special notification state, the special display is performed in the game time. The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein the combination of notification target patterns is restricted so as not to be stopped and displayed.

According to the characteristic B6, in the game times related to the special information corresponding to the imparted information, the combination of the symbols to be imparted is stopped and displayed on one activated line, so that the player corresponds to the imparted information. Can be grasped clearly. In this case, since the combination of the special notification target patterns is stopped and displayed at the game time when the special notification is performed, it is possible for a player to clearly understand that the special notification is supported.

In such a configuration, even when the variable display of the pattern is being performed and the special notification state is set in the predetermined period during the variable display of the pattern, the mode information is determined in the game time. When the variable display time corresponding to the mode information determined by the means is changed to stop and display the combination of the special notification target patterns, the stop display of the combination of the special notification target patterns is limited in the game time. It Accordingly, the effect of the feature B1 or the feature B2 can be obtained while clearly knowing that the special notification is supported.

Feature B7. The stop result of at least the specific variation display area, which is a part of the plurality of variation display areas, is configured to correspond to the variation display time of the corresponding game time, at least in a specific situation,
Even if the special notification limiting means is in the variable display of the pattern in the game time in the specific situation and the special notification state is set in the predetermined period during the variable display of the pattern, the change If the pattern stopped and displayed in the specific variable display area in correspondence with the display time does not correspond to the combination of the special notification target patterns according to the special notification state, the pattern corresponding to the variable display time is The game machine according to feature B6, wherein execution of the special notification is limited by stopping and displaying the game as it is.

According to the feature B7, at least in a specific situation, at least the display mode of the specific variable display area and the variable display time of the corresponding game time are associated with each other, so that the storage capacity to be stored in advance can be reduced. Is possible.

Here, when the special notification state is set during the variable display of the pattern in the game time in the specific situation and during the predetermined period during the variable display of the pattern, the special notification target according to the special notification state When the stop result of the specific variable display area is changed to stop and display the combination of patterns, the variable display time is changed. On the other hand, according to this feature, even if the special notification state is set during the variable display of the pattern in the game time in the specific situation and during the predetermined period during the variable display of the pattern, the change occurs. If the pattern to be stopped and displayed in the specific variable display area according to the display time does not correspond to the combination of the special notification target patterns according to the special notification state that has been set, the pattern corresponding to the variable display time will stop as it is. Execution of the special notification is restricted by being displayed. As a result, in the game times in the specific situation, the change of the variable display time due to the execution of the special notification is suppressed.

Feature B8. In each game time, based on the result of the award determination, a variable display time determining means for determining a variable display time when the variable display of the pattern is performed is provided, and the aspect information determining means is the variable display time determining means. Determines the mode information corresponding to the variable display time determined by
In the display mode corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means, as a previous step of stopping the variable display, one of the plurality of preset active lines in the display screen is displayed on one active line. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a reach pattern (reach pattern) in which the combination of the above-mentioned giving target patterns may be established, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, reach by the final stop display area. Includes a mode to display variable display,
At least the display mode of the game times in which the specific reach variation display is performed is such that the period from the variation start timing to the timing at which the specific reach variation display is started becomes a predetermined period in the final stop display area. Is set so that the mode at the timing when the specific reach variation display is started is set to a predetermined mode, the stop result of the final stop display area is at least the specific mode. At the game times where reach variation display is performed, it is configured to correspond to the variation display time,
It is assumed that the special notification limiting means is performing the special notification state during the predetermined period during the variable display of the pattern in the game time in which the specific reach variable display is performed and during the variable display of the pattern. Also, if the pattern stopped and displayed in the final stop display area corresponding to the variable display time does not correspond to the combination of the special notification target patterns corresponding to the special notification state, the variable display time is supported. The gaming machine according to feature B6, wherein the execution of the special notification is limited by stopping and displaying the symbol as it is.

According to feature B8, in the specific reach variation display, the period from the variation start timing to the timing at which the specific reach variation display is started is a predetermined period, and the specific reach variation display is started. The stop result of the final stop display area corresponds to the variable display time because the mode at the timing to be performed is the predetermined mode. As a result, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for displaying the patterns in a variable manner.

Here, when the stop result of the final stop display area is changed in order to stop and display the combination of the special notification target symbols according to the special notification state in the game time for performing the specific reach change display, the change display time is changed. It will be. On the other hand, according to this feature, even if the special notification state is displayed during the variation display in the game time when the specific reach variation display is performed, the stop display is performed in the final stop display area in correspondence with the variation display time. If the design does not correspond to the combination of the special notification target patterns according to the special notification state, the execution of the special notification is limited by stopping and displaying the pattern corresponding to the variable display time. Has been done. As a result, changes in the variable display time that accompany the execution of the special notification are suppressed.

Feature B9. The plurality of variable display areas are those displayed before the final stop display area, and include a predetermined display area in which a plurality of patterns can be displayed at the same time.
The special notification limiting means sets the special notification state in a situation in which the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined display area is in a more discriminative mode than before, or the pattern in the predetermined display area is stopped and displayed. If there is one picture that is stopped and displayed in the predetermined display area and there is one reach line that can be taken, the aspect information is obtained regardless of the stop result of the final stop display area. The gaming machine according to feature B8, wherein the execution of the special notification is restricted by stopping and displaying the display mode corresponding to the mode information determined by the determining means as it is.

When only one picture is stopped and displayed in the predetermined display area, the picture is uniquely determined as the reach picture. In such a state, when there is only one reach line, there is no room to change the reach pattern and reach line. In this case, according to this feature, the execution of the special notification is restricted by displaying the display mode corresponding to the mode information as it is regardless of the stop result of the final stop display area. As a result, the processing load can be reduced.

Feature B10. The plurality of variable display areas include a predetermined display area that is stopped and displayed before the final stop display area, and the predetermined stop position of the predetermined display area is set as a position through which a plurality of effective lines pass. Has been done,
The special notification control means is set to the special notification state in a situation where the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined display area is in a more discriminative mode than before, or in a situation in which the pattern in the predetermined display area is stopped and displayed. When it is set, and the pattern stopped and displayed at the predetermined stop position in the predetermined display area includes a pattern that constitutes a combination of special notification target patterns corresponding to the special notification state set this time. A combination of the special notification target patterns is displayed by displaying a reach pattern corresponding to the pattern on any one of the effective lines of the plurality of effective lines,
When the special notification restriction unit displays the reach pattern determined by the special notification control unit on a predetermined effective line of the plurality of effective lines, the combination of the giving target patterns is stopped and displayed. In a circumstance, the reach picture determined by the special notification control means is displayed on an effective line different from the predetermined effective line among the plurality of effective lines so that the combination of the giving target pictures is not stopped and displayed. The gaming machine described in the feature B8 or the feature B9.

According to the characteristic B10, since the reach pattern is stopped and displayed on any of the plurality of effective lines, it is possible to diversify the form of the stop result when a specific reach variation display is performed.

Here, when the special notification state is set in a situation where the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined display area is already in a higher discriminative mode than before, or in the situation where the pattern in the predetermined display area is stopped and displayed. When the pattern that is stopped and displayed at the predetermined stop position in the predetermined display area includes the pattern that constitutes the combination of the special notification target patterns corresponding to the special notification state set this time, the combination of the grant target patterns It is possible to stop and display the combination of the special notification target patterns while avoiding. As a result, the opportunity to execute the special notification corresponding to the special notification state is increased.

Feature B11. The plurality of variable display areas include a predetermined display area that is stopped and displayed before the final stop display area, and the predetermined stop position of the predetermined display area is set as a position through which a plurality of effective lines pass. Has been done,
The special notification control means, in a situation where the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined display area is in a more discriminative mode than before, or in a situation where the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined display area is stopped and displayed. When the notification state is set, the pattern that is stopped and displayed at the predetermined stop position in the predetermined display area includes a pattern that forms a combination of special notification target patterns corresponding to the special notification state set this time. In the case of, the reach pattern corresponding to the design is displayed on any of the effective lines of the plurality of effective lines to display the combination of the special notification target patterns,
The special notification restriction means, when the reach pattern determined by the special notification control means is displayed on a predetermined effective line of the plurality of effective lines, the special notification target pattern that does not correspond to the set special notification state In a situation in which the combination is to be stopped and displayed, the reach pattern determined by the special notification control means is selected from among the plurality of effective lines so that the combination of the special notification target patterns is not stopped and displayed. The gaming machine according to any one of features B8 to B10, which is displayed on an activated line different from the activated line.

According to the feature B11, since the reach picture is stopped and displayed on any of the plurality of effective lines, it is possible to diversify the mode of the stop result when a specific reach variation display is performed.

Here, when the special notification state is set in a situation where the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined display area is already in a higher discriminative mode than before, or in the situation where the pattern in the predetermined display area is stopped and displayed. However, if the pattern that is stopped and displayed at the predetermined stop position in the predetermined display area includes a pattern that constitutes a combination of special notification target patterns corresponding to the special notification state set this time, the special set this time is set. It is possible to stop and display the combination of special notification target patterns while avoiding the combination of special notification target patterns that do not correspond to the notification state. As a result, it is possible to associate the game times that triggered the setting of the special notification state with the game times that execute the special notification.

Feature B12. The predetermined notifying unit is a pattern display unit that variably displays a pattern in each of the plurality of variable display areas on the display screen,
The game time control means starts variable display of the pattern on the pattern display means before the grant determination is made by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination made by the grant determination means. Then, the stop result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is ended as one of the game times, and according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is intended to display the variable display of the game times,
The aspect information determining means determines aspect information corresponding to a display aspect of a series of patterns on the display screen when the variable display of the symbols is performed,
The plurality of variable display areas include a final stop display area and a predetermined display area in which a design is stopped and displayed before the final stop display area,
The special notification control means is to perform the special notification by making the stop result of the game times a special mode corresponding to the special notification state, and the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined display area is performed. When the special notification state is set in a situation in which the pattern in the predetermined display area is stopped and displayed in a higher discriminatory manner than before, and the stop result of the predetermined display area is set this time. If it corresponds to the special mode according to the special notification state that has been made, it is possible to make a correction to the stop result of the game times as the special mode,
The special notification limiting means sets the special notification state in a situation in which the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined display area is in a more discriminative mode than before or the pattern in the predetermined display area is stopped and displayed. Even if it is done, at least when the stop result of the predetermined display area does not correspond to the special aspect corresponding to the special notification state set this time, it corresponds to the aspect information determined by the aspect information determining means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B11, wherein the execution of the special notification is restricted by displaying the display mode as it is.

According to the feature B12, even when the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined display area is in a more discriminative mode than before, or even when the pattern in the predetermined display area is stopped and displayed, the stop result is a special mode. Therefore, the chance of executing the special notification is increased.

Here, in a situation in which the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined display area is in a more highly discriminative mode than before, or in the situation where the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined display area has ended, the player displays the pattern in the variable display. You can check. In such a state, if the stop result of the predetermined display area that does not correspond to the special mode according to the special notification state set this time is set to correspond to the special mode, the mode of the change is easily recognized by the player. , There is a risk of giving the player a feeling of strangeness. On the other hand, according to this feature, the special notification is given in a situation in which the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined display area is in a more discriminative mode than before, or the variable display of the pattern in the predetermined display area has ended. Even if it is set to the state, at least when the stop result of the predetermined display area does not correspond to the special aspect corresponding to the special notification state set this time, the display corresponding to the aspect information without becoming the special aspect Execution of special notification is restricted by displaying the mode as it is. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the special notification without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

Feature B13. The special notification control means,
Elapsed determination means (display control device 212) for determining whether or not the special notification state is set by the state setting means from the start of the variable display of the pattern to the elapse of a predetermined reference period. Function of executing the processing of step S2604, step S2608, step S2614, step S3105, step S3111, etc. in the MPU 252 of FIG.
A correction information storage unit (correction table storage area 320) for storing a plurality of types of mode information corresponding to the correction display mode after the reference period;
Based on the fact that the progress determination unit determines that the special notification state is set before the reference period elapses, the aspect information after the reference period in the current game time is changed to the aspect information. And mode information switching means for switching to the mode information for correction corresponding to the mode information of the special mode (function of executing processing such as step S2606, step S2612, step S2618, step S3108, and 3117 in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212). )When,
Equipped with
By switching the mode information to the mode information for correction by the mode information switching unit, the display mode including the stop result of the game times related to the switching is the special mode,
The special notification restriction means corresponds to the mode information determined by the mode information determination means when the special determination state is set by the progress determination means until the reference period elapses, and When the variable display time is changed in switching to the mode information for correction, execution of switching of mode information by the mode information switching unit is restricted, and features B5 to B12 are characterized. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the feature B13, when the initial display mode is changed to the special mode during the game game, a part of the display mode of the pattern is switched to the mode information for correction. The stop result can be a special mode in the flow of. Therefore, the special mode can be displayed without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

In such a configuration, when the variable display time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining unit is changed upon switching to the mode information for correction, execution of the switching is restricted. In this case, the display mode corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means is displayed. The display mode does not correspond to the special mode. Therefore, the execution of the special notification is restricted by restricting the execution of switching the mode information. Therefore, the special notification can be executed without giving the player a feeling of strangeness, and the effect described in the characteristic B1 or the characteristic B2 can be obtained.

Moreover, the mode information is switched only when the display mode can be set to the special mode without changing the variable display time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load related to switching.

Feature B14. A pattern display means for variably displaying the pattern on the display screen (display screen G),
Firing means (gaming ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a gaming ball toward the gaming area based on a launching operation by the player,
A starting ball-in portion (upper working port 33, lower working port 34) that is provided in the game region and into which game balls flowing down the game region can enter
Information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the starting ball entering part,
Acquired information storage means (holding area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with a prescribed number, which is predetermined as a plurality of numbers, as an upper limit,
In the case where the special information stored in the acquired information storage means determines whether or not the special information corresponds to predetermined transfer information and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. Includes a transfer determination means (a function of executing a win/fail judgment process in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81) that sequentially performs the transfer determination on the plurality of pieces of special information.
Based on the result of the transfer determination by the transfer determining means being a transfer correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the transfer information, the game state is transferred to a predetermined predetermined game state. State transition means (function to execute the game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
The variable display of the pattern is started on the pattern display means before the migration determination is performed by the migration determination means or based on the migration determination performed by the migration determination means, and the migration determination is determined. Displaying a notification result corresponding to the result and ending the variable display of the pattern is one of the game times, and the variable display of the pattern of each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means for controlling the pattern display means so as to be performed (a function of executing a variation start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, a function of performing a variation display control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game time control means determines the mode information corresponding to the display mode when the variable display of the pattern is performed based on the result of the shift determination at each game time (display control device 212). Of the MPU 252), and when the variable display of the pattern at each game time is performed, a display mode according to the mode information determined by the mode information determination means is displayed on the display screen. Is something that
Information that reflects the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the transfer determination is set before the predetermined special information becomes the target of the transfer determination. A destination specifying unit (a function of executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the MPU 202 of the main control unit 81) specified at timing;
State setting means for setting a special notification state based on the fact that the identification result by the destination identification means is a predetermined identification result (function to execute the setting process of the hold command in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
When the special notification state is set, the display mode of the game times before the game times related to the special information targeted by the destination specifying means is changed to the destination for the special information targeted for the identification. When a special mode corresponding to the specifying result of the specifying means is set, and the special notification state is set during a predetermined period during the variable display of the pattern in a situation where the variable display is being performed. In addition, special notification control means for performing the special notification by setting the display mode relating to the game times in which the variable display of the pattern is performed to the special mode (corresponding to the reservation notice in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) The function to execute the stop result setting process and the function to execute the changing process)
When the special notification state is set in a predetermined period during the variable display of the pattern in a situation where the variable display of the pattern is being performed, it is determined by the aspect information determination means in the game time. Special notification limiting means (a function for executing the reach handling process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for restricting the execution or the execution mode of the special notification by the special notification control means according to the variable display time corresponding to the mode information. ,
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic B14, the special notification according to the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage unit and not the target of the shift determination is before the special information becomes the target of the shift determination. May be performed in. Thus, for the player, not only the game that causes the game ball to enter the starting ball entering unit and the game that confirms the transition determination result of the special information acquired based on the game ball, but also a plurality of special When the information is stored in the acquired information storage means, for the special information whose order of the transfer determination is later, the result when the transfer determination is targeted is confirmed or predicted according to the content of the special notification. The game of playing is added, and the diversification of games is achieved. Thereby, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

Further, the player recognizes the transition determination result of each game time by visually recognizing the display mode of the pattern on the pattern display means. The mode information according to the display mode of the design is determined by the mode information determination means based on the transition determination result. Then, by changing the display mode of the game times related to the special information that is the target of the transfer determination before the predetermined special information is the target of the transfer determination, the special mode corresponding to the content of the predetermined special information, Special notification is given. As a result, if the player is paying attention to the display screen of the pattern display means in order to grasp the transition determination result of each game, the player can naturally check the special notification, and even if the special notification is given. First, it is suppressed from being overlooked.

Furthermore, in the situation where the variable display of the pattern is being performed, and if a new ball is entered into the starting ball entry section during the predetermined period during the variable display, special information acquired based on the ball entry. There is a case where the special notification state is set by and the special notification corresponding to the special notification state is performed at the game time when the variable display of the pattern is performed. As a result, when special notification is given, it is possible to shorten the time from the occurrence of a ball entering the starting ball entering section until the special notification is given, and the special notification is given to the player. The chance to confirm is increased.

In such a configuration, when the designating means is used in a situation where the variable display of the pattern is being performed and the display mode in the game time is a special mode corresponding to the specified information, the mode is changed in the game time. Depending on the variable display time corresponding to the mode information determined by the information determining means, the execution of the special notification or the execution mode thereof is limited. Here, when the variable display time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining unit and the variable display time corresponding to the special mode are different, for example, the variable display time is changed to display the special mode. In this case, since the variable display time fluctuates with the execution of the special notification, there is a possibility that a difference occurs in the digestibility of the game times per unit time depending on the game hall. On the other hand, if the special mode is displayed without changing the variable display time under the condition that the variable display of the pattern is being performed, the display mode becomes unnatural and the player may feel uncomfortable. There is. On the other hand, according to the variable display time corresponding to the mode information determined by the mode information determining means as described above, the execution of the special notification or the execution mode thereof is limited, so that the occurrence of the above inconvenience occurs. It is possible to increase the degree of attention of the game while suppressing it.

From the above, it is possible to appropriately raise the degree of attention to the game.

Feature B15. A pattern display means for variably displaying the pattern on the display screen (display screen G),
Firing means (gaming ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a gaming ball toward the gaming area based on a launching operation by the player,
A starting ball-in portion (upper working port 33, lower working port 34) that is provided in the game region and into which game balls flowing down the game region can enter
Information acquisition means (function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the starting ball entering part,
Acquired information storage means (holding area RE) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means with a prescribed number, which is predetermined as a plurality of numbers, as an upper limit,
In the case where the special information stored in the acquired information storage means determines whether or not the special information corresponds to predetermined transfer information and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. Includes a transfer determination means (a function of executing a win/fail judgment process in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81) that sequentially performs the transfer determination on the plurality of pieces of special information.
Based on the result of the transfer determination by the transfer determining means being a transfer correspondence result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the transfer information, the game state is transferred to a predetermined predetermined game state. State transition means (function to execute the game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
The variable display of the pattern is started on the pattern display means before the migration determination is performed by the migration determination means or based on the migration determination performed by the migration determination means, and the migration determination is determined. Displaying a notification result corresponding to the result and ending the variable display of the pattern is one of the game times, and the variable display of the pattern of each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game time control means for controlling the pattern display means so as to be performed (a function of executing a variation start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, a function of performing a variation display control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212),
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game time control means determines the variable display time when the variable display of the pattern is performed based on the result of the shift determination in each game time (variable display time determining means (in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212). When a variation display of the pattern of each game is performed, a display mode corresponding to the variation display time determined by the variation display time determination means is displayed on the display screen. Is something
Information that reflects the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the transfer determination is set before the predetermined special information becomes the target of the transfer determination. A destination specifying unit (a function of executing a confirmation process for holding notice in the MPU 202 of the main control unit 81) specified at timing;
State setting means for setting a special notification state based on the fact that the identification result by the destination identification means is a predetermined identification result (function to execute the setting process of the hold command in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
When the special notification state is set, the display mode of the game times before the game times related to the special information targeted by the destination specifying means is changed to the destination for the special information targeted for the identification. When a special mode corresponding to the specifying result of the specifying means is set, and the special notification state is set during a predetermined period during the variable display of the pattern in a situation where the variable display is being performed. In addition, special notification control means for performing the special notification by setting the display mode relating to the game times in which the variable display of the pattern is performed to the special mode (corresponding to the reservation notice in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) The function to execute the stop result setting process and the function to execute the changing process)
When the special notification state is set in a predetermined period during the variable display of the pattern in a situation where the variable display of the pattern is being performed, it is determined by the variable display time determination means in the game time. Special notification limiting means (a function for executing the reach handling process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for limiting the execution or the execution mode of the special notification by the special notification control means according to the variable display time.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the characteristic B15, the special notification according to the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage unit and not the target of the shift determination is before the special information becomes the target of the shift determination. May be performed in. Thus, for the player, not only the game that causes the game ball to enter the starting ball entering unit and the game that confirms the transition determination result of the special information acquired based on the game ball, but also a plurality of special When the information is stored in the acquired information storage means, for the special information whose order of the transfer determination is later, the result when the transfer determination is targeted is confirmed or predicted according to the content of the special notification. The game of playing is added, and the diversification of games is achieved. Thereby, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

Further, the player recognizes the transition determination result of each game time by visually recognizing the display mode of the pattern on the pattern display means. The display mode of the design is determined according to the variable display time determined by the variable display time determining means. Then, by changing the display mode of the game times related to the special information that is the target of the transfer determination before the predetermined special information is the target of the transfer determination, the special mode corresponding to the content of the predetermined special information, Special notification is given. As a result, if the player is paying attention to the display screen of the pattern display means in order to grasp the transition determination result of each game, the player can naturally check the special notification, and even if the special notification is given. First, it is suppressed from being overlooked.

Furthermore, in the situation where the variable display of the pattern is being performed, and if a new ball is entered into the starting ball entry section during the predetermined period during the variable display, special information acquired based on the ball entry. There is a case where the special notification state is set by and the special notification corresponding to the special notification state is performed at the game time when the variable display of the pattern is performed. As a result, when special notification is given, it is possible to shorten the time from the occurrence of a ball entering the starting ball entering section until the special notification is given, and the special notification is given to the player. The chance to confirm is increased.

In such a configuration, when the special notification state is set in a predetermined period during the variable display of the pattern in a situation where the variable display of the pattern is being performed, the variable display determined by the variable display time determining means. Execution of the special notification or its execution mode is limited according to the time. Here, when the variable display time determined by the variable display time determining means and the variable display time corresponding to the special mode are different, for example, if the variable display time is changed to display the special mode, Since the variable display time fluctuates with the execution of the notification, there is a possibility that a difference occurs in the digestibility of the game times per unit time depending on the game hall. On the other hand, for example, if the special mode is displayed without changing the variable display time under the condition that the variable display of the pattern is being performed, the display mode becomes unnatural and the player may feel uncomfortable. .. On the other hand, when it is necessary to change the variable display time determined by the variable display time determining means as described above, the execution of the special notification or the execution mode thereof is restricted, which causes the inconvenience as described above. It is possible to increase the attention level of the game while suppressing the occurrence.

From the above, it is possible to appropriately raise the degree of attention to the game.

Below, the basic configuration of various game machines to which the above respective features can be applied is shown.

Pachinko gaming machine: operating means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each game component arranged in the area and gives a bonus to the player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of each of the game components.

10...Pachinko machine, 33...Upper working port, 34...Lower working port, 41...Symbol display device, 53...Game ball launching mechanism, 81...Main control device, 202...MPU, 203...ROM, 204...RAM, 212... Display control device, 221... Acceptance table storage area, 223... Fluctuating display time table storage area, 252... MPU, 253... Program ROM, 254... Work RAM, 255... VDP, 312... Medium symbol row stop result table storage area, 315 ...Stop line change table storage area, 318...retention notice reach symbol determination table storage area, 320...correction table storage area, RE...holding area, Z1 to Z3...symbol row.

Claims (1)

A pattern display means for variably displaying the pattern on the display screen,
An information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means, with a prescribed number that is predetermined as a plurality of numbers as an upper limit,
In the case where the special information stored in the acquired information storage means determines whether or not the special information corresponds to predetermined additional information and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. Is a grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination for the plurality of special information,
A privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determining means being a grant corresponding result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information;
The variable display of the pattern is started in the pattern display means before the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means or based on the grant determination performed by the grant determination means. Displaying the stop result corresponding to the determination result and ending the variable display of the pattern is one of the game times, and the change of the pattern of each game time according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game number control means for controlling the pattern display means so that display is performed,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The game time control means determines, for each game time, mode information that determines mode information corresponding to the mode of display of the pattern on the display screen when the variable display of the pattern is performed, based on the result of the grant determination. When a variation display of the pattern of each game time is provided, a variation display of the pattern of each game time is performed in a display mode according to the mode information determined by the mode information determination means.
Information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is the target of the addition determination is set before the predetermined special information is the target of the addition determination. Destination specifying means to specify at timing,
A state setting means for setting a special notification state based on the specific result by the destination specifying means being a predetermined specific result,
In a situation in which the special notification state is set, in a situation in which a game time before the game time related to the special information specified by the destination specifying means when the setting is performed is being executed In such a situation that the special display corresponding to the identification result of the destination identification means for the special information as the identification target is executed by the design display means, and the variable display of the design is performed. When the special notification state is set in a predetermined period during the variable display of the pattern, special notification control means for causing the stop result of the game time to be a special mode corresponding to the special notification,
When the special notification state is set in a predetermined period during the variable display of the pattern in a situation where the variable display of the pattern is being performed, it is determined by the aspect information determining means in the game time. If the variable display time corresponding to the mode information that is present is a variable display time that needs to be changed to make the stop result the special mode, a special notification that prevents the stop result of the game time from being the special mode Limiting means,
Equipped with
A high probability state that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is likely to be the grant corresponding result, and a low probability state that is less likely to be the grant corresponding result than the high probability state is set,
As the granting correspondence result, the first granting correspondence result set to the high probability state after the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means, and the low probability after the privilege is granted by the privilege granting means The second assignment correspondence result set to the state is set,
The pattern display means has a first variable display area, a second variable display area, and a third variable display area as a plurality of variable display areas.
The game times control means, predetermined to the plurality of variable display area predetermined first effective line on which is formed by on the display screen, among the first grant picture corresponding to the previous SL first grant corresponding results by displaying stopped by aligning the pattern, to inform that the special information that triggered of the game times is the special information corresponding to the first grant corresponding result, to the effective line on the front Stories second The special information that triggers the game times is the special information corresponding to the second grant correspondence result by stopping and displaying the predetermined designs of the second grant patterns corresponding to the grant correspondence result. Is configured to notify
When the special notification state is set with the special information that is the first allocation correspondence result as a trigger, the special notification control unit is on the active line in the game time corresponding to the first allocation correspondence result. aligning with the predetermined pattern of said first imparting design to stop, is stopped and displayed all the variable display area in the plurality of variable display area, and the effective line on the predetermined one of the first grant picture If align the picture performs the special notification as said special mode that so as not to display stopped, setting of the special notification state is performed in response to the special information to be the second grant corresponding results, the In the game time corresponding to the second grant corresponding result, a predetermined pattern of the second grant patterns to be aligned and stopped on the activated line is stopped and displayed in all the variable display areas in the plurality of variable display areas, a and the effective on-line align the predetermined pattern of said second imparting design to perform the special notification as said special mode that so as not to display stop configuration,
In each game time, based on the result of the award determination, a variable display time determining means for determining a variable display time when the variable display of the pattern is performed is provided, and the aspect information determining means is the variable display time determining means. Determines the mode information corresponding to the variable display time determined by
In the mode information determined by the mode information determination means, as a step before the final stop of the variable display, stop display is performed in the first variable display area and the second variable display area of the plurality of variable display areas. Reach variation display in which a reach line is formed with the same pattern and the pattern is variably displayed in the third variable display area of the plurality of variable display areas under the condition that the reach line is formed. Aspects are included,
At least in a game game in which a specific reach variation display mode is performed, a pattern stop-displayed in the third variation display area is uniquely determined according to the variation display time determined by the variation display time determination means. Has been
The Specific reach varying display mode, said first applying pattern and the first specific reach varying display aspects Reach line is formed by either one of the pattern of said second imparting design, the first grant And a second specific reach variation display mode in which a reach line is formed by the pattern and a reach line is formed by the second imparted pattern,
The special notification control means is in a situation where the special notification state is set to the special notification state by the state setting means, and in the game time when the specific reach variation display mode is performed, the first variation display area and the second variation Execute reach pattern setting processing in which the reach pattern that is stopped and displayed in the display area to form the reach line is the first assigned pattern or the second assigned pattern corresponding to the special information that triggered the special notification. In addition, by keeping the pattern stopped and displayed in the third variable display area as the pattern corresponding to the variable display time, the specific reach variable display in the special notification state is set. In the game time in which the mode is performed, there is a configuration in which the special notification is executed and a case in which the special notification is not executed,
The special notification limiting means is a situation where the variable display of the pattern is being performed in a mode in which the reach variable display mode is not executed, and the special notification state is set during a predetermined period during the variable display of the pattern. If the variation display time corresponding to the aspect information determined by the aspect information determining means in the game time is the variation display time that needs to be changed to make the stop result the special aspect, , The special notification state is set in a situation in which the variation display of the pattern is being performed in a manner in which the reach variation display mode is executed, while preventing the game times from being stopped as the special mode. When the special notification state is set, the reach pattern setting process is not executed, and the pattern that is stopped and displayed in the third variable display area is variably displayed regardless of the period when the special notification state is set. By keeping the pattern according to the time, when it is necessary to change the variable display time at the game time, the stop result of the game time does not become the special mode,
The second specific reach varying display mode is performed by the second picture of the first picture and the second applying pattern of said first imparting picture, the first picture pattern in the third variation display region and in Yu technique of times that the second pattern still appears stopped, the state is set to the special notification state by setting means, the special notification was triggered state of setting the special information the first grant corresponding results I Oh, the special case where it is configured to perform the special notification in notification status by said first pattern of said first imparting design, the second identification by said second pattern and said first pattern A gaming machine comprising means for changing the reach variation display mode of No. 1 to the first specific reach variation display mode by the first pattern.

Images